diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-03-03 05:18:28 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-03-03 05:18:28 -0800 |
| commit | 686c17fc3990260c642cb90efb92082cf414e563 (patch) | |
| tree | 0ddaf3b912017b2976584a99cc3241bd0ef2753f /37466-8.txt | |
| parent | df17ea94bec8d411fd8570835f56c36716d6cabf (diff) | |
Diffstat (limited to '37466-8.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 37466-8.txt | 9424 |
1 files changed, 0 insertions, 9424 deletions
diff --git a/37466-8.txt b/37466-8.txt deleted file mode 100644 index ca40563..0000000 --- a/37466-8.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,9424 +0,0 @@ - LOST IN THE CAÑON. - - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with almost -no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it -under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this -eBook or online at http://www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Title: Lost in the Cañon - -Author: Alfred R. Calhoun - -Release Date: September 17, 2011 [EBook #37466] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 - -*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST IN THE CAÑON *** - - - - -Produced by Roger Frank, Mary Meehan, and the Online Distributed -Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net. - - THE STORY OF - Sam Willett's Adventures on the Great - Colorado of the West. - - _By_ ALFRED R. CALHOUN, - - _Author of_ - "Cochise," "Excelsior," "The Californians," etc., etc. - - ILLUSTRATED. - - NEW YORK: - A. L. BURT, PUBLISHER. - - _Copyright 1888, by A. L. Burt._ - - ---- - -[Illustration: _Sam succeeded in guiding the raft to a ledge of sloping -rocks._] - - ---- - - - - -CONTENTS - - - CHAPTER I.--A REMARKABLE CAMP. - CHAPTER II.--LOOKING BACKWARD AND FORWARD. - CHAPTER III.--SAM'S TRIALS BEGIN. - CHAPTER IV.--A PERILOUS SITUATION. - CHAPTER V.--AT HURLEY'S GULCH. - CHAPTER VI.--WHY THE PAPERS WERE NOT BROUGHT. - CHAPTER VII.--THE WONDERFUL VOYAGE BEGINS. - CHAPTER VIII.--MR. WILLETT AND HANK TIMS. - CHAPTER IX.--A FRUITLESS EFFORT. - CHAPTER X.--A NIGHT OF AWFUL GLOOM. - CHAPTER XI.--A TRYING SITUATION. - CHAPTER XII.--THE VOYAGE IS RESUMED. - CHAPTER XIII.--WHIRLED AWAY. - CHAPTER XIV.--ORDER AND DISORDER. - CHAPTER XV.--THE PROVISIONS ALL GONE. - CHAPTER XVI.--DANGER AHEAD. - CHAPTER XVII.--MR. WILLETT LEARNS THE NEWS. - CHAPTER XVIII.--IN THE RAPIDS. - CHAPTER XIX.--AFLOAT AGAIN. - CHAPTER XX.--THE TRIAL BEGINS. - CHAPTER XXI.--A BREAK IN THE CLOUDS. - CHAPTER XXII.--"JOY! JOY! IT IS ULNA AGAIN!" - CHAPTER XXIII.--THE TRIAL IN PROGRESS. - CHAPTER XXIV.--OUT OF THE DEPTHS. - CHAPTER XXV.--FROM SAFETY INTO DANGER. - CHAPTER XXVI.--THE TRIAL ENDS. - CHAPTER XXVII.--THE APACHES HAVE THEIR WAY. - CHAPTER XXVIII.--A BOLD MOVE. - CHAPTER XXIX.--THE VERDICT AND SENTENCE. - CHAPTER XXX.--SURPRISE FOR HURLEY'S GULCH. - CHAPTER XXXI.--HOW IT FARED WITH SAM AND HIS FRIENDS. - CHAPTER XXXII.--IN GREATER PERIL STILL. - CHAPTER XXXIII.--IN A TRAP. - CHAPTER XXXIV.--A BRIEF TRUCE AND WHAT FOLLOWED IT. - CHAPTER XXXV.--A NIGHT BATTLE. - CHAPTER XXXVI.--TO THE RESCUE. - CHAPTER XXVII.--SAM'S DEVOTION IS REWARDED. - CHAPTER XXXVIII.--THE LAST, BUT NOT THE LEAST IMPORTANT. - LOST. - FATE OF AN ENTRAPPED BEAR. - A FIGHT IN THE WOODS. - - ---- - - LOST IN THE CAÑON. - - ---- - - - - -CHAPTER I.--A REMARKABLE CAMP. - - -The scene of this narrative is laid in Southwestern Colorado, and the -date is so recent that boys living out there at that time are only just -beginning to think themselves young men--and it is really astonishing -how soon boys leap into vigorous manhood in that wild, free land. - -"We's 'bleeged to hab 'im, for dah ain't de least scrap ob meat in de -camp!" - -This stirring information was shouted by a stout negro boy of fifteen or -sixteen years of age, who, with a long, rusty, single-barrel shot-gun in -his arms, stood at the base of a towering mass of bare rocks, and looked -eagerly up at two other youths creeping along the giddy heights, and -evidently in eager search of something that had escaped them, but which -they were determined to overtake. - -The lithe form, long black hair, and copper-colored skin of one of the -young hunters bespoke him an Indian of the purest type. He wore a -close-fitting buckskin dress, and slung at his back was a short -repeating rifle. - -The other youth up the rocks, though bronzed on the hands and face to a -color as dark as the young Ute's, had the blue eyes and curly yellow -hair that told of a pure white ancestry. His name was Samuel Willett, -and though not much more than sixteen years of age, his taller form and -more athletic build made him look several years the senior of his red -and black companions. - -Sam Willett was armed and dressed like a hunter, and his well-worn -equipments told that he was not out masquerading in the costume of a -theatrical Nimrod. - -The Indian youth, Ulna, and Sam Willett had chased a Rocky Mountain or -bighorn sheep into the mass of towering rocks which they were now -searching; and that they were not hunting for mere sport was proven by -Ike, the black boy's repeated cry: - -"We's 'bleeged to hab 'im, foh dar ain't de least scrap ob meat in de -camp!" - -"I want to get the meat as much as you do, Ike, so have patience!" Sam -shouted down, without stopping in his pursuit an instant. - -The two daring hunters disappeared, and Ike, whose desire for meat was -greater than his love for the chase, began circling about the confused -pile of rocks so as to keep his companions in sight. - -The bighorn "sheep" is in reality not a sheep at all, but a variety of -powerful mountain antelope, whose strength, speed and daring among the -rocks and cañons are not the least wonderful things about the wonderful -land in which he makes his exclusive home. - -Even old Western hunters believe that these animals can leap from -immense heights and land on their horns without harm, but this is an -error. - -While Ike was gazing with eager eyes and open mouth at the towering, -volcanic cliffs, the bighorn came to view on a rock five hundred feet -overhead. - -The hunters were close behind, and the creature's only means of escape -was to leap across a chasm fully thirty feet wide to another rock of a -little lower elevation. - -"Shoot! shoot!" yelled the excited Ike, as the bighorn gathered himself -up and eyed the terrific gorge that beset his course. - -As if stung to desperation by the shout the creature leaped forward with -a force that must have cleared the gulf, and an accuracy that would have -insured a landing on the other side, but just as it sprang into mid-air -two shots rang out within a small fraction of a second of each other, -and the bighorn came crashing down and fell dead at the black boy's -feet. - -In his wild excitement Ike discharged the rusty single-barrel shot-gun, -which he had been hugging in his arms as if it were a baby. All the -power of the old-fashioned weapon must have been in the report and -recoil, for the former sounded like the explosion of a howitzer, and the -latter was so terrific as to send the holder sprawling across the -carcass of the bighorn. - -Sam Willett saw all this as he hurried down the rocks, otherwise he -might have thought when he had reached the bottom that the animal had -fallen on his companion and faithful servant and killed him. - -"Hello, Ike, old fellow, what's up?" asked Sam, as he helped the owner -of the shot-gun to his feet. - -"Is I all alive, foh shuah, Mistah Sam?" demanded Ike, as he stared -wildly about him. - -"Of course you are, and here is the meat you have been so eager for," -said Sam. - -"Wa'll, Mistah Sam, it's dat ar gun," said Ike, gazing sadly at the old -weapon which he still held in his arms. "I ain't used her bad; ain't -fired her off for more'n six months afore we kem out har from -Michigan--dat's five months ago--an' now only to tink she's done gone -back on me in dat are way." - -The Indian youth, Ulna, had come down by this time, and when he took in -the situation his fine, almost effeminate face was wreathed in smiles, -that displayed a beautiful set of white teeth. - -In a low, musical voice and without any accent, he said in excellent -English: - -"The sun is setting and we must hurry if we would reach the camp before -dark." - -"An' more partikler ez we've got to tote dis ar venizon home," said Ike, -now wide awake to the necessities of the situation. - -Each of the youths had a hunting knife in his belt, and they soon proved -that these weapons were not carried for ornament. - -With a rapidity and skill that would have won the admiration of an -eastern butcher, they skinned and cleaned the animal, severed the -mammoth head and then divided the meat into three parcels. - -Each had to shoulder about fifty pounds, but being sturdy, healthy young -fellows they did not seem to mind their burdens, as they started off -with long, vigorous strides toward the west. - -The sun in all his course does not look down on a wilder, grander or -more desolate land than that which met the gaze of the young hunters, no -matter to which side they turned. - -Verdureless mountains of fantastic shapes rose into the cloudless sky on -every hand. - -Here and there in the crevices of the black volcanic rocks, over which -they hurried, a stunted sagebush or a dwarf cactus suggested the awful -barrenness of the place rather than told of vegetation. - -They were in the land of cañons and drought, on the summit of the Great -American Plateau where rain but seldom falls, where the streams flow -through frightful gorges, and where men and animals have often perished -from thirst within sight of waters which they could not reach. - -Bleak and sublime as the land was, is, and ever must be, yet the -belief--a well founded belief by the way--that its gloomy ravines -contained gold, led hundreds of hardy miners and adventurers to look -upon it as that El Dorado for which the early Spanish explorers in these -wilds had sought in vain. - -As the leader of the little party, Sam Willett, strode ahead, the -deepening shadows of the mountains impelled him each instant to a -quicker pace. - -There was no apparent trail, yet Sam never hesitated in his course, but -kept on as unerringly as a bird of passage, till he came to a great -black rift that seemed to suddenly open at his feet. - -Away down in the shadowy depths he could see a white band that told of -moving water. - -A glow, the source of which could not be seen, indicated a fire down -near the base of the cliff, and the barking of a dog--the sound appeared -to come from the depths of a cave--suggested a human habitation. - -On reaching the crest of the chasm Sam Willett did not hesitate, but at -once plunged down to what, to a stranger, would appear certain death. - -Along the cañon wall there was a steep but well constructed trail that -afforded secure footing to a traveler who was not troubled with -giddiness. - -Without once stopping, Sam and his companions made their way to the -bottom of the rift and forded the roaring torrent that thundered over -its uneven bed. - -On the cañon wall, opposite to that by which they had descended, they -saw about a hundred feet above the stream, what seemed like a number of -illuminated pigeon holes. This was their home, the place to which had -been given the not inappropriate name of "Gold Cave Camp." - -With barks of delight, a big dog met them near the water and joyously -escorted them up the other side to an irregular plateau, about a hundred -feet in diameter, that shot out like the once famous Table Rock at -Niagara. - -This plateau was in front of the cave, in which the miners had made -their home. - -The background of light revealed the forms of three men. The dress and -long cue of one bespoke him a Chinaman, the second was dressed like a -hunter, and the third, a tall, powerful figure, had only his heavy beard -and striking stature to distinguish him. - -"Is that you, Sam?" called out the tall man, as the foremost of the -party reached the plateau. - -"Yes, father," was the reply, "and we have brought back some meat." - -"Wa'll!" exclaimed the second man, "I didn't think thar was a pound of -live meat left within twenty mile of yar." - -"Hoolay! Bully! Now me gettee suppel!" cried the excited Chinaman, who -was known by the fitting name of Wah Shin. - -Preceded by Maj, the dog, Sam and his fellow hunters entered the -remarkable cave--of which we shall speak hereafter--and laid the meat on -the floor. - -"I began to grow uneasy about you, my boy," said Mr. Willett, as he -fondly kissed his son, "meat is very desirable, but I would rather -suffer for it than be worried at your absence." - -Sam explained about the delay in the hunt, and then went to a spring -that rose from the floor of the cave close to the fire, and here he set -the example of drinking and washing himself. - -Meanwhile Wah Shin began to demonstrate his position in that strangely -mixed company. In nearly no time he had steaks broiling on the coals, -the savory odor of which made Hank Tims, the old guide, take long -inhalations with great enjoyment. - -Apart from meat there was an abundance of other food in this strange -camp, so that in a very short time Wah Shin, with Ike's aid, had a most -excellent supper spread on a table consisting of two roughly-hewn cedar -slabs, supported at either end by a square stationary stone, that had -been placed there by the original but unknown cave dwellers. - - - - -CHAPTER II.--LOOKING BACKWARD AND FORWARD. - - -It is not a little remarkable that the six dwellers in Gold Cave Camp -should represent four of the five types into which scientists divide the -human race, but this though curious in itself, is not nearly so much so -as their being residents of this sparsely settled wilderness, and -living, as it were, in caves in the depths of the earth. - -Mr. Willett had been a merchant in Detroit, Michigan, where his only -child, Sam, was born. - -He had been very happy in his married life and very prosperous in his -business; but, alas, for the stability of human affairs, his wife died. -Following this awful calamity came a series of reverses in business -which no human foresight could prevent. His property was swept away, and -in his fortieth year he found himself a poor man, with a son to educate -and care for and all life's battle to fight over again. - -Mr. Willett had been educated as a mining engineer, and though he had -never followed his profession he, very naturally, looked to it as a -means of support when all his other resources were gone. - -In the days of his great distress and perplexity he read of sudden -fortunes being made in the newly-discovered gold fields of the San Juan -country in Southwestern Colorado, and thither he determined to go. - -Although still in the prime of life, Mr. Willett concentrated all the -love of his brave heart on his son and resolved to devote his time and -thought to his care and education. - -Sam's maternal grandfather, Mr. Shirley, was a very rich, but a very -morose and eccentric old man, who chose never to become reconciled to -his daughter's marriage to Mr. Willett. But when Sam's mother died, the -old gentleman offered to adopt his grandson and make him his sole heir, -if the father would consent to renounce all claims to him. - -In his son's interest Mr. Willett might have considered this proposal -favorably had not Sam himself upset the scheme by saying stoutly: - -"Father, do not ask me to leave you, for I feel it would be sending me -to death. If you go to the West, I shall go with you. There are only two -of us left, why should we be parted?" - -Mr. Willett replied to this query by kissing his son, and so it was -settled that they should go to the West together. - -Ike was an orphan lad who, in some inexplicable way, had drifted up to -Michigan from Kentucky. Mr. Willett found and cared for the boy, and he -repaid this generosity by a fidelity and devotion worthy of all praise. - -Mr. Willett could see no use for Ike in the West, but when the time for -departure came, the black boy appeared at the depot with an old hunting -bag, containing all his clothing, slung at his back, and a -remarkable-looking shot-gun folded in his arms. - -"Dar's no use a talkin' to me, boss," he said to Mr. Willett, when that -gentleman expressed his surprise at the boy's appearance. "Ize bound to -go 'long wid Mistah Sam. Oh, don't yeh feel skeat 'bout de cash foh de -passage. Ize got ebery cent I ever earned stored away har; its more'n -fifty dollar, an' I'll foot de bills till de las' red cent's gone." - -In proof of this bold statement, Ike drew from the depths of his -trousers' pockets a bag containing several pounds weight of bronze, -nickel and silver coins. - -Ike found an eloquent advocate in Sam; and so it came about that at the -very last moment Mr. Willett decided to take the colored boy with him, -though he could not be made to avail himself of the generous fellow's -hoardings. - -The three went to Denver, thence over the Rocky range to St. Luis Park, -and over the Sierra Madre mountains to the San Juan country. - -They had procured horses to ride on, and two pack mules to carry their -supplies and mining tools. - -While at Port Garland in the St. Luis Park, they met with Hank Tims and -the Ute boy, Ulna, who was a nephew of the great chief Uray, whom the -writer of this narrative knew very well and greatly admired. - -Hank Tims and Ulna were themselves thinking about going into the San -Juan country, and, as they were well acquainted with that region and -appeared to take to Mr. Willett's party at once, they were readily -induced to join his expedition. - -It would be out of place in this brief but essential review to recount -all the adventures that beset our friends till they reached the scene of -their proposed labors. - -After much wandering, they found Gold Cave Camp, but it was in the -possession of a wild, dissolute fellow named Tom Edwards. - -As Edwards was working his claim all alone and was eager to leave it, -Mr. Willett bought him out at his own price, and at once made -preparations to pan for such gold as might be found in the bed of the -cañon. - -A few days after the commencement of operations, Wah Shin appeared in -the camp. - -He looked as if he had been blown in from the bleak hills, but he -managed to explain in his broken English that he had lost himself coming -up from Santa Fe, and that he was a first-class cook. - -He asked for "a job," but even before Mr. Willett had made up his mind -to hire him, he set to work to give an exhibition of his skill; and the -result was so entirely satisfactory that he was retained on his own -terms. - -But it is much easier to explain the presence of these people than it is -to account for the strange home in which they lived. - -Learned men claim that long before the coming of the white men to this -continent, long, indeed, before the coming of the Indians, that there -was a strange race of people in that Western land, whom, for the want of -a better name, they call "The Cave Dwellers." - -But no matter how formed, or by whom they were first inhabited, these -caves--they are quite common in that land--made ready and comfortable -homes for the mining adventurers. - -Those occupied by Mr. Willett and his associates, consisted of a series -of eight apartments, all opening on the plateau and all connected by -passage ways that must have been the work of human hands. - -The apartments were circular in shape, and the largest, which was used -as a kitchen and general store room, was about twenty feet in diameter -and ten feet in height. - -As before stated there was an ample spring of delicious cool water in -this apartment, and the original hewers of the caves, no doubt, selected -the place on this account. - -After a hearty supper, Mr. Willett and Hank Tims lit their pipes and sat -before the fire, for though the days are warm in this land the nights -are unusually cool. - -Drift wood, picked up from the crevices of the rocks in which it had -been lodged by floods caused by the melting of snow in the mountains, -constituted the fuel of the camp, and the great pile near the fire -showed that it was to be had in abundance. - -All had been working hard that day, so after a desultory talk about the -great success that was meeting their search for gold, they lay down on -their blanket cots in the other apartments and went to sleep--that is, -all but Sam and his father. - -Mr. Willett and his son slept together in the nearest room, but though -they lay down side by side they did not go to sleep at once. - -"Sam," said Mr. Willett in a troubled voice, "since you left this -morning that fellow, Tom Edwards, has been here again." - -"What did he want?" asked Sam. - -"He appeared to be drunk, and he threatened to kill me if I did not give -him more money." - -"But you have paid him the price agreed on?" - -"Yes." - -"Then I should not heed him." - -"Still, I am afraid he will cause me trouble, so, to-morrow, I will ride -over to Hurley's Gulch and consult a lawyer, and as that is our nearest -market and post-office, I will take Hank and Ulna along with two pack -mules so as to carry back supplies." - -"That is forty miles away, so that you will be gone several days. But if -you must go, father, I will do the best I can while you are absent," -said Sam, laying his hand soothingly on his father's broad breast. - -"I know you will, my boy, but there is another matter I wished to speak -with you about." - -"What is that, father?" - -"Why, this Tom Edwards brought me a letter from your grandfather's -lawyer in Michigan. It tells me that the old man is dead, and that in -his will he leaves all his property to you, but you are not to have a -cent of it till you are twenty-one years of age----" - -"Four years and a half, dear father!" cried the excited Sam. - -"But," continued Mr. Willett, "the will further says that if you should -die in the meantime that the property is to go to your grandfather's -nephew, Frank Shirley." - -"A bad, disreputable man to whom neither you nor mother would speak," -said Sam. - -"He is all that, I fear, and it troubles me to learn from Edwards that -Frank Shirley has recently come into this land," said Mr. Willett. - - - - -CHAPTER III.--SAM'S TRIALS BEGIN. - - -While daylight was flooding the upper world next morning, and the -shadows were lifting from the gloomy depths of the cañon, the modern -cave dwellers ate their breakfast. - -About three hundred yards above the caves the cañon widened out into a -valley some three hundred yards in diameter. The bottom of this valley -was covered with rich grass, and in it was a grove of cotton-wood trees -whose bright verdure gave the place the appearance of a rich emerald gem -in a mighty setting of granite. - -In this valley the horses and pack mules were kept, and, as they had but -little to do, they might be said to "live in clover." - -While it was still dusky in these depths, though the glimpses of far-off -ruddy mountain peaks told that the sun was rising in the upper world, -Sam and Ike, who were hardly ever apart, went up to the valley and soon -returned with three horses and two mules, the latter were to carry back -the necessary supplies from Hurley's Gulch. - -It had been Mr. Willett's custom to make this trip once a month, so that -his going now was not an unusual event, yet his face showed that he was -much dejected, as if he had a premonition of the awful calamity that was -so soon to come upon himself and his beloved boy. - -His last words, as he kissed Sam, were: - -"If anything should happen to detain me longer than four days, I will -send a letter back by Ulna." - -"But we'll be back on time," joined in Hank Tims, "for I don't like -crowds, an', then, we've struck pay dirt rich up at the head of the -valley, an' I'm just a spilein' to see how it'll pan out to the ind." - -Good-bys were said, and Sam, Ike and Wah Shin stood on the plateau -before the cave and waved their hats, till the three men had led the -animals up the giddy trail and disappeared beyond the towering summit of -the cliff. - -Under the teaching of his father and Hank Tims, Sam had become a -skillful gold miner, that is, so far as panning out the gravel and -collecting the gold were concerned. - -The fact that he was the prospective heir to a large fortune did not -unfit him for work this morning. With Ike he went up to the sluices -immediately after his father left, and until the sun was in mid-heaven -they worked, shoveling gravel into the cradle and rocking it under the -water, and only stopping to pick out the nuggets and yellow dust and -scales that rewarded their effort every hour. - -By means of an old-fashioned horn, Wah Shin summoned them to dinner. Of -the fresh meat he had made pies that would have tempted an invalid's -appetite. And, as the boys ate, sitting before the entrance to the cave, -the Chinaman's face fairly glowed with delight at the evidence of his -excellent cooking. - -"Ven'zon pie belly good," chuckled Wah Shin, as he produced a second -when the first had vanished. "But man eatee too muchee, den get mebbe -sick." - -"Dat ar edvice is 'tended foh Mistah Sam," laughed Ike, as he helped -himself again. "But vanzon pie an' 'possums are two tings I ain't nebber -got my fill ob up to dis time." - -Sam heard but did not heed the talk of his companions, for his attention -was at the moment attracted to two strange men who were slowly making -their way down the trail on the opposite side of the cañon wall. - -As there was danger from prowling bands of Indians who had left the -reservation, and also from white outlaws who frequently robbed weak -mining camps, every one at Gold Cave Camp strapped on a belt, with a -knife and pistols in it, as regularly as he pulled on his boots. - -Starting to his feet and followed by Ike, Sam went down to the stream, -getting there just as the two men reached the bottom. - -One of the strangers was a tall, dark-bearded man, with one eye, and the -other was a short, yellow-skinned man with a mean expression of face, -whom Sam recognized as his cousin, Frank Shirley. - -Sam had never spoken to this man, so he did not greet him like an -acquaintance now. - -Both men were well armed, as is the fashion of the country, and when -they came within hailing distance, Frank Shirley called out: - -"Hello, young man, is this Mr. Willett's camp?" - -"It is, sir," was Sam's reply, as he came to a halt. - -"Is Mr. Willett home?" - -"He is not." - -"Where is he?" - -"He has gone to Hurley's Gulch." - -"When did he leave?" - -"This morning." - -"Ah, I'm sorry I missed him. When do you expect him back?" - -"In a few days. Won't you come over and have some dinner?" asked Sam, -waving his hand in the direction of the plateau, on which Wah Shin was -visible. - -"Thank you; no. We are going on to Hurley's Gulch, and are in a great -hurry," said Frank Shirley, turning and whispering to his companion, who -nodded vigorously in response. - -"Who shall I say called?" asked Sam, as the two men turned to ascend the -trail. - -"Friends," was the laconical reply. - -"If dem's frien's," said Ike, when the men had gone out of hearing, "den -Ize de biggest kind ob a foe." - -The conversation of the two men when they reached the top of the cliff -proved the black boy's surmise to be correct. - -They had left their horses hitched to a rock, and as they prepared to -mount, Frank Shirley said to his companion: - -"That's the boy, Badger." - -"The boy ez stan's atween you an' fortune?" said Badger. - -"Yes." - -"Wa'll, ain't you hired me to help you clear the way?" - -"I have, Badger." - -"Good; then let us git rid of the father first, an' then all the rest'll -be ez smooth ez ile." - -"You will stick to your contract?" - -"I'd be a fool if I didn't. You pay expenses an' give me ten thousand -dollars to get 'em out of the way. Isn't that it?" - -"That's it, Badger," said Frank Shirley, as he mounted and rode along -beside his companion. - -"That ar boy down thar," said Badger, waving his hand back at the cañon, -"ain't no slouch. He'll fight, he will; an' the best way with sich is to -give 'em no chance." - -"No chance," echoed Frank Shirley, "that's it exactly. And now that we -have them parted our opportunity has come." - -"Just ez if 'twas made to order," said Badger. - -After the men had gone, Sam and Ike went to work again, but the former -had lost the cheerfulness that distinguished him in the morning. - -He could not get those two men out of his mind, not that he feared their -return--indeed, he could not account to himself for the strange feeling -of dread that possessed him for the next three days. - -While working, on the afternoon of the fourth day since his father's -departure, he noticed that the sky had become overcast and that the -water in the bed of the stream was rapidly rising. - -He and Ike quit work earlier than usual, and they had great difficulty -in making their way to the caves through the swollen torrent. - -They had hardly reached cover when a terrific storm came up and the -cañon became as dark as night, while the roar of the waters and the -crashing of the thunder were ceaseless and appalling. - -It was about nine o'clock at night, and the three occupants of the cave -were sitting with awed faces before the fire, when, to their -inexpressible surprise, Ulna, the young Ute, stood dripping before them. - -"How did you reach here?" asked Sam, springing to his feet and grasping -Ulna's hand. - -"I rode till I killed my horse, then I ran for hours. The flood was up, -and it is rising, but I managed to swim across----" - -"But my father!" interrupted Sam, pleadingly laying his arm on the young -Indian's shoulders. - -"He and Hank Tims are prisoners at Hurley's Gulch," said Ulna. - -"Prisoners." - -"Yes, and in the hands of the lynchers who charge them with the murder -of Tom Edwards. Here is a letter from your father that will explain -all," said Ulna, pulling a damp paper from his pocket and adding, "your -testimony is wanted at once to clear the accused; but no man can cross -the cañon for a week, and then it will be too late!" - - - - -CHAPTER IV.--A PERILOUS SITUATION. - - -Sam Willett had courage and fortitude in no common degree, but the words -of Ulna, who stood dripping and panting before him, froze him with a -speechless terror. - -He took the wet paper from the Indian boy's hand, but for some seconds -he had neither the courage nor the strength to open it. - -The howling of the wind down the gorge and the hoarse roaring of the -maddened waters heightened the terror of the situation. - -Wah Shin, though not well versed in English, fully understood the import -of Ulna's message, but realizing his own inability to do or to suggest -anything, he stood with his lips drawn and his little oblique eyes half -closed. - -Ike was the only one of the party who did not appear to have lost the -power of speech. Taking the letter from Sam's hand, he said: - -"Dat ar paper's powahful damp, an' I reckon, Mistah Sam, yeh kin read it -bettah if so be I dries it so's it won't fall to pieces." - -Ike opened the paper and while he held it before the fire, Ulna briefly -explained the situation. - -He said that Mr. Willett, Hank Tims and himself reached Hurley's Gulch -without any mishap. - -They found the rude mining camp in a great state of commotion owing to a -robbery and murder that had recently been committed. - -The more law-abiding, or rather the more industrious, for there was no -organized law in the place, had formed a vigilance committee to hang the -next murderer or robber, under the wild sanction of "lynch law." - -"Just as soon as we reached Hurley's Gulch," continued Ulna, "we met Tom -Edwards, and he was very drunk and very abusive. He shouted to every one -he met that Mr. Willett had robbed him, and took Gold Cave Camp from him -without paying a cent, though he had promised fifteen hundred dollars." - -"Why, the man lies infamously!" interrupted Sam. "I was a witness to -Edwards' receipt for the money in full, and I have it here among -father's papers." - -"And that receipt is what your father must have at once in order to -clear him of the charge of robbery and murder," said Ulna. - -"Murder!" repeated Sam. - -"Yes. Last night Tom Edwards was found dying with a pistol bullet in his -breast, and with his last breath he swore to the men who found him that -your father and Hank Tims shot him to get rid of paying the money they -owed him. The vigilantes at once arrested Mr. Willett and Tom, and they -swear they will hang them if they do not prove that Tom Edwards was -paid. I saw the money paid myself, but they refuse to take the word of -an Indian," said Ulna, with a flash of indignation in his splendid black -eyes; then continuing, "but they agreed to let me come here for the -paper." - -"Heah!" cried Ike, springing from beside the fire, "de lettah's dry -enough to read. Let's know w'at Mistah Willett he has to say foh -hisself." - -Sam took the paper, and kneeling down to get the benefit of the light, -he read aloud as follows: - - "_My Dear Son_:--I do not want you to be at all alarmed at my - detention. Ulna will explain why neither Tom nor I can return - till you have brought us the receipt which Tom Edwards signed - when I paid him the money in full for his claim at Gold Cave - Camp. - - "This receipt you will find among the papers in my saddle-bags. - Bring it to me with all speed and leave Ulna back in charge of - the camp; it does not matter if the mining ceases till we - return. - - "I regret to have to tell you that Tom Edwards is dead. He was - drunk when he received the shot that killed him, and he accused - Hank and me of the crime. If the people here knew us well they - would not believe this charge for one instant, but they do not, - and so we must wait till we can show the vigilance committee who - hold us prisoners, that we could have no motive for, even if we - were inclined to do this awful deed. - - "I saw Frank Shirley here yesterday afternoon in company with a - well-known desperado who goes by the name of 'One-Eyed Badger.' - I cannot but think that these two men are at the bottom of this - new trouble, but what their reasons can be I cannot even guess; - certain it is that I have never done them or any one else a - wrong knowingly. - - "Do not lose heart, for I have no fear as to the result: only - come as soon as you can to your loving father, - - "_Samuel Willett._" - -Sam read this over rapidly, then he read it a second time with more -deliberation. - -"De boss am in a bad fix," groaned Ike, "an' I jest wish I could take -his place." - -"I shall go to my father at once," said Sam, stoutly. - -He went to the saddle-bags, got the necessary papers--the receipt and -deed--and placed them securely in the inner breast pocket of his -buckskin tunic. - -"You no gettee on holse an' lide such night as deez coz it was so muchee -stolmy?" said Wah Shin when he saw Sam getting out his saddle, bridle -and rifle. - -"I must get to Hurley's Gulch before another day," was the resolute -reply, "if I have to go there on my hands and knees." - -"But you cannot go to-night," protested Ulna. "Come and see the danger." - -He took Sam by the arm and led him out to the plateau before the -entrance to the cave. - -It has been said that it but seldom rains in this land, but when it does -the watery torrents come down with a continued fury, of which the -dwellers in more favored climes can have only the faintest conception. - -The bare rocks refuse to absorb the rain as it falls, and so the -ever-accumulating waters sweep into the cañons and fill the narrow beds -between the precipitous banks with wild torrents, that must be once seen -before an adequate idea can be formed of the tremendous and seemingly -irresistible power of water in action. - -The four occupants of the caves, all fine types of four human races, -went out to the plateau. - -The light, streaming through the cave opening, cut across the inky -blackness of the cañon like a solid yellow shaft, that made the -surrounding darkness more impenetrable. - -Laden with sheets rather than drops of rain, the wind swept down the -ravine with a force that threatened to tear the observers from the rocks -and hurl them into the seething torrent. - -"Before this time," said Ulna, speaking with the calmness that -distinguished all he said, "the valley is flooded and the horses up -there are drowned." - -Sam shuddered but made no reply. - -He went back to the cave, secured a lighted brand, and, returning to the -edge of the plateau, he dropped it over. - -It went hissing down. If the current were as low as the day before it -should have fallen sheer down for a hundred feet, but before going half -that distance, it lit up an expanse of water white with foam, and was -extinguished. - -The result of this experiment brought Sam's heart to his mouth, and he -could not have uttered a word if the life of the father he so well loved -depended on it. - -"If she keeps on a-climbin' up dat way," groaned Ike, "de watah'll be -nigh into de cave by mawnin'." - -Sam now recalled that he had found drift-wood lodged in the crevices of -the rocks, even higher than the entrances to the cave, and from this he -inferred that at the highest water no one could stay in the cave and -live. - -Maj, the fine setter dog, had been moaning beside the fire all the -evening, but now he came out and crouched at his young master's feet, as -if his instinct told him of the danger and that he wanted protection. - -Fearing that the poor horses were gone, and well knowing that it would -be madness to attempt to cross the cañon that night, Sam turned sadly to -his companions and said: - -"We can do nothing till daylight comes. Let us get in out of the storm." - -They returned to the cave and silently sat down on the stones that had -been placed for seats near the fire. - -It was a most trying situation. - -Even if Mr. Willett and Hank Tims had been safely there in the cave, the -ever-increasing storm and the possibility, or rather the certainty of -its danger if it continued would have been sufficient to drive sleep -from the eyes of all. - -But Sam Willett, brave, unselfish youth that he was, gave no thought to -the peril of his own surroundings. - -With his chin resting between his up-turned palms, he looked steadily at -the dying fire without seeing it. - -His heart and his thoughts were ever with his sorely-tried father at -Hurley's Gulch, and he groaned as he read in the beating of the storm -the edict that might bar his going to the rescue. - -But though unmindful of himself, it was not in Sam's nature to neglect -the comfort of others. - -"Lie down, all of you," he said to his companions, "and I will stand -guard till daylight comes." - -After a weak protest, Wah Shin, Ulna and Ike brought in their blankets -and lay down before the fire. - -Ike pretended that he did not want to sleep, but, after an attempt at -desultory talk, his eyes closed and he soon became oblivious to his -surroundings. - -Maj continued to be restless and frightened. Now and then, as if to -judge for himself how the storm was getting on, he would go to the cave -opening, and, after whining in a pained way for some seconds, he would -come back and crouch down near the fire with his nose resting on his -young master's knees. - -To sorrow-stricken Sam Willett that night seemed like an eternity of -darkness. - -He was beginning to feel that the storm had destroyed the sun, when the -grey light of another day began to creep slowly into the cave. - - - - -CHAPTER V.--AT HURLEY'S GULCH. - - -Hurley's Gulch, though subsequently called "Hurley City," has no right -on the map if it ever had a place there, for, like many other more -ambitious and important cities, it has ceased to be the abode of man and -returned to its original state of barrenness and desolation. - -It was at this time a mining camp that had sprung up in a night, as it -were, when a man named Hurley--after whom the place was named--had -discovered gold in a little creek near the spot that so suddenly became -the site of busy mining life. - -Though less than six months old and destined not to survive a second -birthday, Hurley's Gulch had nearly a thousand inhabitants, with stores, -saloons, assay offices, hotels and all the business establishments that -characterize such places. - -There were a few women in the camp and a sprinkling of Indians, Negroes -and Mexicans, but the great mass of the inhabitants were miners, rough -in appearance and even rougher in speech. - -A more picturesque and novel settlement than Hurley's Gulch it would be -impossible to find outside the peculiar mining camps of the West. - -Two little streaks of grass could be found growing beside the creek on -the bluff above which the camp had been established; but beyond this -there was hardly a sign of vegetation in sight. - -All about the place, far as the eye could reach, was a tempest-tossed -expanse of dry, glistening rocks. - -As there was neither timber for building nor material for bricks, the -dwellings, stores, saloons, hotels and offices were necessarily of -canvas. - -The tents were pitched here and there irregularly, and as all of them -had seen hard service in other mining camps and "cities," their general -appearance was patched and dilapidated in the extreme. - -The great majority of the men at Hurley's Gulch were industrious miners; -but as vultures hover over the track of an army in the field and wolves -follow up a buffalo herd to prey upon the weakest, so crowds of -well-dressed gamblers and red-faced whisky sellers swarm in prosperous -mining camps to plunder and demoralize. - -Hurley's Gulch had more than its share of these wicked fellows, and as -there was not the shadow of law there to defend the weak, every man went -armed as a matter of course. - -Until law officers can be elected or appointed and courts of justice -established in such camps, it is the custom of the more industrious and -peaceable to form what they call "vigilance committees" for their own -protection. - -It need not be said that, no matter how well-meaning the purpose, many -men, themselves criminals, get on such committees, and that great wrong -is often done to the innocent by these rude efforts to do justice. - -Mr. Willett's was a case in point. - -A few days before he had come over this last time to Hurley's Gulch, a -hard-working miner had been killed and robbed of the gold-dust which he -had patiently panned out from the bed of the stream. - -This crime made the miners angry, and they held an indignation meeting -after the poor man's funeral, and organized a committee to ferret out -and punish the criminals. - -As there was no jail in which to detain those guilty of lighter -offences, there was only one penalty in the code of the vigilantes, and -that was _death_! - -Tom Edwards had not been a favorite with the better class of men at -Hurley's Gulch. - -In his opinion money was made for the sole purpose of gambling away and -getting drunk on. - -It was generally believed that he had been paid for his claim at Gold -Cave Camp by Mr. Willett, so that many who heard him declare to the -contrary and say that he had sold on credit, placed no faith in his -word. - -But when Tom Edwards was found dying the night before Mr. Willett was to -have left the Gulch, his past falsehoods were forgotten in view of the -nearness of his end and the calmest were inclined to believe him. - -It was well known that hot words had passed that very day between Mr. -Willett and Tom Edwards, and this afforded to many a reason for the act. - -It was pitchy dark when the wretched man was shot, and he was very drunk -at the time, so that when his wound restored him, for a short time, to -his senses, there can be no doubt but he was honest in the belief that -"two men," Mr. Willett and Hank Tims were the guilty parties. - -The accused men were at once arrested by the vigilance committee and -placed under guard in a tent. - -Both protested their innocence, as well they might, and Mr. Willett -asked to be permitted to send to his camp for papers that would prove to -all that he had paid Tom Edwards in full the price at which he valued -his claim. - -A few men were inclined to believe Mr. Willett, but to set all doubts at -rest, it was decided that further action should be postponed in the case -till the receipt of the money and the deed of sale had been procured. - -The next morning Ulna was dispatched on this mission, and we have seen -the fidelity with which he performed the duty and the unexpected -obstacles that prevented the return of the accused man's son with the -papers. - -There were two men at Hurley's Gulch at this time who, if they had -chosen, could have set at rest all doubts as to the mystery surrounding -Tom Edwards' death and handed over the guilty parties to the vigilantes; -but as this act would have resulted in their own swift destruction, they -kept their awful secret to themselves. - -These men were Frank Shirley and the outlaw Badger. - -Frank Shirley believed, and with reason, that if Sam Willett was out of -the way, the last bar between him and a great fortune would be down. - -He was a dissolute, thriftless fellow, every faculty of whose low mind -seemed to have been concentrated into the one mean gift of cunning. - -On the way from Gold Cave Camp to Hurley's Gulch, Frank Shirley and the -man whom he had hired to help him in his wicked purpose, discussed the -situation from every point of view. - -The first thing they decided on was that Mr. Willett and his son must be -prevented from ever meeting again, but they did not agree so readily as -to how this was to be done. - -More bluff, and possibly more brutal than his employer, Badger urged -that he be allowed to waylay Mr. Willett and kill him on his return. - -But Frank Shirley opposed this, saying, for he was a coward at heart, as -all such men are: - -"Willett will have with him the Indian boy and the old hunter, Hank -Tims; they are all well-armed, and they would be stronger than us. No, -Badger, we must hit upon some plan that has less risk in it." - -"Wa'al," responded Badger, "hit upon the plan yersel', an' if I don't -carry it out without flinchin', I'll give you leave to shoot me down -like a dog." - -When these men reached Hurley's Gulch they found Edwards "drunk as -usual," and loudly declaring wherever he went that Mr. Willett was -trying to rob him out of fifteen hundred dollars. - -Here was the very chance for which Frank Shirley had been looking. - -If he could have Edwards put out of the way, in such a manner as to -fasten the crime on Mr. Willett, a hundred stronger and braver men would -be ready to accomplish his purpose with their own hands. - -He told Badger of his scheme, and that creature, without a moment's -thought of the awful crime he was about to commit, pledged himself to -carry it out when the other gave the word. - -To add to the evidence against Mr. Willett, as that gentleman was -arrested, Frank Shirley appeared to be very much cast down. - -With tears in his eyes, he explained to the many who were only too eager -to listen, that Mr. Willett had married his, Shirley's, cousin, that he -had borne a bad character in Detroit, and that he had recently fled from -that city to escape the consequences of his many crimes. - - - - -CHAPTER VI.--WHY THE PAPERS WERE NOT BROUGHT. - - -Before awaking his companions, all of whom seemed to be sleeping -heavily, Sam went out to see if the flood in the cañon had risen. - -He ventured but a few yards beyond the entrance to the cave, for the -sight that met his eyes appalled him. - -The rain was still pouring down in torrents, and the flood had risen -till it was nearly on a level with the plateau. - -"Three feet more and it will be into the cave," he said, speaking aloud. - -"Watel littee mole high up no cannee stay, mus' allee die if no can -swimmee," said a voice behind Sam. - -There was no need to ask whose it was. - -Wah Shin, with thoughts of breakfast in his mind, had got up, but first -he decided to satisfy himself of the condition of affairs outside. - -"Yes, Wah Shin," said Sam, without turning his head, "even as I look at -the flood it appears to be rising." - -"If it come mole up, wat we allee do?" - -"I don't know." - -"No cannee stop dis place?" - -"I fear not." - -"Way we go den, no can tink." - -"Nor can I think either, Wah." - -"If no can lib, den no coz wy die hungly," said Wah Shin, and with this -belief strong in his mind, he re-entered the cave and set about getting -breakfast with his usual indifference to the state of the weather. - -At any other time the sight of the flood and the danger of its coming -higher would have alarmed Sam greatly, but though he could not ignore -the danger that threatened him now, his own situation was lost sight of -as he thought of his father's position. - -He was still standing looking at the rushing flood, as if fascinated by -its power and volume, when Ike and Ulna came out and joined him. - -"Foh massy's sake!" exclaimed Ike, when he caught sight of the water. -"Ain't she jest a bilein' up." - -"Do you think the water will rise higher?" asked Sam as he turned to -Ulna, and tried to find some comfort in his calm, impassive face. - -Before replying Ulna looked up at the sky for some seconds, then said: - -"The storm is not half over." - -"And while it lasts the water will go on rising?" - -"Yes, Sam, that is what we must expect." - -"Then it will flood the cave?" - -"It will surely do that." - -"And drive us out?" - -"Yes, Sam, if we don't want to drown there." - -"Then we must try to leave?" - -"Yes, we must try to leave," echoed Ulna. - -"But how can we get away?" - -"Ah," said Ulna, with something like a sigh, "I cannot now think of how -that's to be done." - -"If so be we was all birds, we could fly," said Ike, very solemnly, -"it'd come in mighty handy-like jest 'bout dis time." - -Sam now realized that he must think and act for his companions as well -as for himself. - -His was a brave, sturdy, self-reliant nature, that grows stronger and -stronger in the face of increasing trials and responsibilities. - -"Let us go in out of the rain and think," he said, while he turned and -nervously stroked his forehead. - -When they went back to the cave they found that Wah Shin had a good -breakfast ready, and was still busy cooking more food. - -When asked by Sam why he was doing this, he said, as if it were a matter -of course. - -"Bime by, watel him come in, puttee out file; file him go out, no can -cookee; no got tings cookee, no can eat; no eatee den allee mus' die." - -"Well, Wah Shin," said Sam with a grim smile, "if there is any hope in -cooking, keep at it while the food lasts." - -Despite their troubles and the dangers that cut them off from the world -and threatened their lives, all, Maj included, complimented Wah Shin's -efforts in their behalf by partaking of a hearty breakfast. - -During the meal Sam was unusually silent; it was evident he was thinking -very hard, and the others did not attempt to disturb his deliberations -till he had risen from his seat, then Ulna asked: - -"Have you thought out a way to get across the cañon, Sam?" - -"I have thought out a way of trying it," he answered. - -"How?" - -"On a raft." - -"But we have no raft." - -"Then we must make one." - -"Where is the timber?" - -"There is some here in the form of slabs and firewood, and there is -plenty whirling down with the flood. You can handle a lariat, Ulna?" - -"I think I can," was the response. - -"Then get a rope, we have a lot here in the cave; make a noose and -secure all the long pieces of timber you can. The water is nearly up to -the plateau, and Ike will help you pull them out." - -"An' watee can me do?" asked Wah Shin. - -"Keep right on cooking, for if we cannot cross the flood on the raft, -we'll be swept into the great cañon of the Colorado, and there we shall -need all the food we can take along." - -The others set to work with a will, but even Ulna, who was born out in -that land, only faintly comprehended the import of what Sam said about -the great cañon. - -Indeed, Sam himself had only a vague notion of what was meant by the now -famous geographical name. - -He knew the history and geography of his own country very well, as every -well-trained youth should, and he was, therefore, aware that the great -Colorado of the West was formed by the junction of two important rivers, -the Green and the Grand; he was further aware that the water roaring -outside entered the latter river about twenty-five miles below the camp. - -Had these been ordinary rivers there would be good reason to dread -venturing out on their currents at flood time, even in a good boat; but -the Green and the Grand for many score miles above their junction flowed -through immense rocky defiles or cañons, and they united in one mighty -cañon, through which flowed for fully four hundred miles the waters of -the Colorado on their way to the Gulf of California. - -Sam had talked a great deal about this wonderful chasm with Hank Tims, -and that most reliable authority had assured him that only two parties -had ever attempted to go through the great cañon and returned to tell of -their perilous adventures and hair-breadth escapes. - -Hank claimed to have stood on a cliff that rose straight up from the -edge of the Colorado at one point, and looked down a sheer perpendicular -depth of over seven thousand feet, the very thought of which is enough -to make an ordinary head giddy. - -But Sam helped to make a craft that would enable them to cross the two -hundred feet that separated them from the opposite bank, and this -accomplished in safety, they could make their way on foot to Hurley's -Gulch, where he knew his father was eagerly awaiting his coming. - -He secured all the gold dust about his own person, and then made up -bundles of blankets, provisions and ammunition that might be of use if -they did not succeed in making a crossing. - -This done, he went out and found that Ike and Ulna had succeeded in -staying and landing a great deal of drift-wood, just the thing for a -raft, and a number of stout poles that might be used in guiding it. - -By this time the flood had risen still higher and higher, and was now -ankle deep on the plateau outside the cave opening, and there was not a -moment to lose. - -With an energy that was all his own, and a skill that surprised himself, -Sam set about building the raft. - -By means of ropes, the longer timbers were securely lashed side by side, -and over these, like a deck, the lighter slabs taken from the cave were -nailed. - -When this clumsy and insecure structure was completed, Sam saw that the -food, blankets, arms and ammunition were tied so that they could not be -swept off by the wash of the waters. - -It comforted him somewhat to know that all his companions could swim, -though the stoutest swimmer could not last long in the mad torrent -sweeping past. - -Sam assigned each one a position, and gave him strict instructions as to -what he must do under certain circumstances; and Maj seemingly well -aware of what was up, crouched down in the center of the raft. - -"Now," said Sam, as he stood up, pole in hand, at one end of the raft, -"we must wait for the current to float us off, and trust in God." - - - - -CHAPTER VII.--THE WONDERFUL VOYAGE BEGINS. - - -Under and around the raft the waters surged and poured, as if they were -testing the strength of the frail structure before lifting it up and -hurling it away to destruction. - -With his feet well apart to balance himself, and the long pole ready in -his strong hands, Sam stood pale but resolute. - -They had only a few minutes to wait. - -Ike and Wah Shin sent up a cry of horror as, with the roar of an angry -monster, the current swept the raft into the stream. - -With the grim stoicism of his race, Ulna looked about him without -seeming to be at all disturbed by the awful situation. - -Sam's object was to get across to the other side of the cañon and effect -a landing with his party, for he never for an instant lost sight of the -fact that his father's freedom if not his life depended on his reaching -Hurley's Gulch at once with the papers in the Edwards case. - -But alas for all the schemes planned by love and executed by courage! -What was man's strength and daring to the weight of the piled-up, flying -waters? - -The instant the raft swung away from the plateau Sam saw that his pole -was of no use, for the river bottom was fully one hundred feet below the -surface. - -He tried to use the pole as a paddle, but his efforts had no effect on -the course of the raft. - -It was hurled like a plaything by some mighty, unseen power, into the -center of the flood; then, with the speed of a racer urged on by whip -and spur, the frail ark went flying down the cañon. - -For the life of him Sam could not utter a word. His face was blanched, -but it was not with fear, though death seemed now inevitable. - -"What will become of poor father!" This is what poor Sam would have -cried out if he could have given expression to the one thought that -filled his brain and the one feeling that stirred his heart. - -But neither Ike nor Wah Shin attempted to restrain their cries, though -their voices were nearly drowned out by the never-ceasing roar of the -torrent. - -Wah Shin was terror-stricken, and in his fright he forgot his little -store of defective English and shouted for help in his native tongue. - -The effect on Ike was to change the color of his face to a dark grey, -and to make the whites of his eyes very conspicuous. He was devoutly on -his knees, though he clung to the logs with both hands, and prayed with -an earnestness that there was no mistaking. - -In much less time than it takes to describe the feelings of the -passengers they were whirled out of sight of the caves and were rushing -down between the towering cañon walls with a velocity that was truly -appalling. - -It was Sam's belief, as well as the belief of the others, after they saw -that crossing was impossible, that they would be crushed by the great -jagged rocks that beset their course, but they soon discovered that they -were in the middle of the current, and that they were passing in safety -the obstructions that threatened ruin every instant. - -The bravest men tremble on the eve of their first battle, and their -hearts sink when they hear the first rattle of the skirmishers' rifles. -But as the time passes without their being shot down, they become -indifferent to the dangers that at first alarmed and unnerved them, and -fight with the coolness and confidence of veterans. - -A sailor will laugh at a storm that is full of terrors to the landsman, -for it is certain that familiarity with danger does breed contempt. - -After the raft had dashed on for an hour or more, our friends began to -feel confident and to look at the situation without fear in their eyes. - -Ike was the first to speak; perhaps because Wah Shin had not yet -regained his knowledge of English. After winking very fast for fully a -half minute, he said: - -"It don't seem like's if we was goin' to sink--at least not yet a bit." - -He had to shout this out to make himself heard, and Sam, in response, -had to speak in the same tones. - -"If we can find a place where we can make a landing, I don't care how -soon she sinks after that." - -"Dar don't appeah to be much show foh a land in dese ar parts," said -Ike, as he looked up at the walls that not only formed the sides of the -cañon, but which seemed to block their advance, for the course of the -river was tortuous in the extreme, so much so, indeed, that they could -but rarely see more than a few hundred yards in advance. - -At length, and after they must have floated more than twenty miles, the -cañon of Gold Cave Creek entered the much greater and more sublime cañon -of Grand River. - -Here the bed of the river was so much wider, that though there was more -water in it, it flowed with a current that was calmness itself when -compared with the fierce mountain torrent that had recently made the -raft its plaything. - -With a great sigh of relief, Wah Shin now proceeded to show that his -knowledge of English had come back to him. - -"Dees place no so belly bad likee dat place we way back alle come flom." - -"This is Grand River," said Ulna, speaking for the first time, and -seemingly as calm as if he were in a place of safety, as he added: "And -further down all the cañons of the Green and Grand rivers unite to form -the mighty Colorado." - -"I hope we may be able to land before we reach there," said Sam Willett, -who had now discovered that by means of the pole he could steer the raft -in the calmer water. - -Even the dog regained confidence. Maj had been crouching down on the -blankets, and wincing and trembling with fear, but he sat up when the -smoother current was reached, and licked his lips and moved his tail in -a way that left no doubt as to his approval of the changed condition of -affairs. - -But though the current of Grand River was slow as compared with that of -Gold Cave Creek, it would be a mistake to imagine that it was at all -stagnant. - -The beds of all its tributaries were swollen at this time, so that the -waters of Grand River were thirty feet above the average level and -moving with a speed of four or five miles an hour. - -Although continually watching for some place in which he could make a -landing, it was not till near sunset that Sam found such a spot as he -wanted. - -The river soon widened out into a bowl-shaped valley, on the margin of -which there were benches of dry ground, covered with stunted little -cedars that gave a grave-yard appearance to the place. - -By means of their poles Sam and Ulna succeeded in forcing the raft to -the shore, where it was securely fastened, and Wah Shin and Ike sent up -prayers of thanks, each after his fashion. - -This arrangement had been made none too soon, for they had not finished -removing the cargo from the raft when the black shadows of night seemed -to rise up from the water, for the glow on the top of the cañon walls -showed that it was still comparatively light in the upper world. - -"Wa'al," said Ike when the last of the cargo was safely stored under the -cedars, "w'at am de nex' t'ing on de programmy?" - -"De nex' t'ing," replied Wah Shin as he began getting out his pots, pans -and supplies, "is dat we makee file, den we has to gettee hot someting -mebbe fol to eat." - -This admirable suggestion met with general approval. - -That there had been higher floods than this the drift-wood lodged in the -crevices of the neighboring rocks abundantly attested. - -As it had not only stopped raining by this time, but the clouds had -exhausted themselves and vanished from the strip of sky visible above -their heads, they had no difficulty in starting a fire. - -In the ruddy glow the yellow current, roaring and sweeping near by, took -on the hue of blood, but our friends were too hungry, weary and anxious -to be impressed by this. - -Wah Shin had plenty of food cooked, but he very wisely thought that it -would be more palatable if warmed over and a cup of good coffee added to -the meal. - -Despite the dangers that surrounded them and the woful anxiety about his -father, that was never absent from Sam Willett's heart, he could not -help being impressed by the wild weirdness of the situation. - -He kept his feelings bravely to himself and expressed pleasure at the -appetites shown by his friends, while trying to comfort them with a -half-felt hope that they might be able to escape from the cañon on the -morrow. - - - - -CHAPTER VIII.--MR. WILLETT AND HANK TIMS. - - -Mr. Willett and his friend and fellow prisoner, Hank Tims, were kept -securely guarded in a tent situated in about the center of the -straggling habitations that went to make up the camp at Hurley's Gulch. - -Hank, who knew the country and the climate better than any white man in -it, was well aware, from the continuence and violence of the storm, that -it was spread over a wide area, and that the heavy rainfall and the -consequent melting of snow on the crests of the higher mountains would -flood all the streams flowing into the great Colorado. - -He did not wish voluntarily to confess his fears to Mr. Willett, and yet -he felt that it was only right that that gentleman should know what -effect the storm might have on their own lives. - -"Do you know what I have been thinking ever since night came and the -rain has been dashing on the canvas over our heads, as if determined to -get in?" said Mr. Willett, along toward morning, on the day following -the departure of Ulna for Gold Cave Camp. - -"Mebbe ye've been thinkin' that this is a powerful stormy night," -answered Hank, at a venture. - -"Yes, and that the storm will be apt to flood the cañon where the boys -are." - -"Wa'al," drawled Hank, as if weighing his words, "this yar rain'll be -mighty apt to raise the creeks in the bottoms of the cañons." - -"What if Ulna should not be able to get across?" - -"He'll get across, no fear of that," said Hank. "But thar's another -important pint in the case." - -"What is that, Hank?" - -"It's can Ulna git back an' fetch yer son with him." - -"And what do you think about that, Hank?" - -"I don't know what to think." - -"But, surely, you have some idea." - -"Oh, yes," said Hank, his hand to his ear to measure the sound of the -pouring rain, and his gray eyes intently fixed on the ceiling, as if he -were trying to find out when the flood would break through and drench -them. - -"Well," said Mr. Willett, nervously, "what's your opinion?" - -"I don't really think that Ulna, or Sam, ken git back to Hurley's for -days. Cos why, they can't cross the flood to the trail, an' no man -could, onless he chanced to be rigged with wings, like a bird, an' up to -this time I ain't run acrost a human mortal fixed in that way, though -I'll allow that sich an addition would be powerful convenient at times." - -"But if my son can't come here, what then?" - -"You mean, how will it fare with us?" - -"Yes, Hank, that is what I mean." - -"Wa'al, it'll depend on many pints." - -"Give me some of them." - -"If the men in these diggins keep sober, we ken hope for fair treatment, -but if they don't it'll go hard on us. But all that depends on the -storm," said Hank, with great deliberation. - -"On the storm?" repeated Mr. Willett. - -"Yes; that's what I said. Of course, you understand that if the rain -keeps on an' raises the creek har at Hurley's, then the miners won't be -able to work for days an' days?" - -"I understand that, Hank." - -"Wa'al, if they don't work, an' have somethink to okerpy their minds, do -you know what they will do?" - -"I haven't the slightest idea," said Mr. Willett. - -"Why, they'll crowd into the saloons an' git drunk. When even a -well-meanin' man is drunk he's a beast, but when these rough fellows -drink that devil's broth, whisky, why it makes 'em reg'lar out and out -fiends." - -"I understand you," said Mr. Willett sadly. - -The two men relapsed into silence and again lay down on the blankets -that had been given them by the vigilance committee. - -Hank Tims was right in his surmise. - -Morning brought no cessation to the storm, and as a consequence the -miners could not work, for Hurley's Gulch was transformed from a little -stream into a raging torrent. - -As has been before stated, a majority of these miners were industrious, -honest men; and their vigilance committee, though apt to do wrong in its -efforts to be just, had a repressing effect on the lawless element. - -These men were honest in the belief that Mr. Willett and his companion -were responsible for the death of Tom Edwards, and it must be confessed -that all the circumstances--circumstances that were strengthened by the -dying man's statements, pointed that way. - -The "Grand Union Hotel," the most important establishment at Hurley's -Gulch, was composed of three tents, and old dilapidated tents at that. - -The front tent was occupied by a bar, the center tent as a kitchen and -dining room, and the rear canvas afforded space for the guests to spread -their own blankets and sleep as best they might. - -Frank Shirley and Badger had their headquarters at the Grand Union. -Here, the following day, the miners gathered to discuss the effect the -storm might have on the return of the messenger with the paper that was -to show that Mr. Willett had paid Edwards in full for his claim at Gold -Cave Camp. - -A few men believed Mr. Willett's story, but yet, in deference to the -wishes of the majority they were willing to have a trial, but not till a -sufficient time had passed for the floods to subside so that the -messenger might have a chance to return. - -Frank Shirley saw the drift of affairs, and, without seeming to do so, -he made up his mind to direct it. - -He was well supplied with money, and feeling that he had a large fortune -to fall back on, if he managed his game properly, he decided to give -every man, for nothing, all the whisky he could drink, and then when he -had the camp crazed with liquor to turn them at once against Mr. -Willett. - -In carrying out this monstrous scheme, Frank Shirley was ably seconded -by Badger. - -The storm continued throughout the day, but the sound of its fury was -gradually deadened by the uproar of the drunken men in and about the -Grand Union Hotel. - -From being a well-meaning crowd of miners, they gradually became a mob -of fierce and profane drunken men, with no more moral conception of -their conduct than the inmates of a mad-house. - -By the time night came again, they had forgotten their promise to give -the accused men a hearing, and were resolved to slay them at once. - - - - -CHAPTER IX.--A FRUITLESS EFFORT. - - -The blankets and bundles carried on the raft were pretty well soaked by -the rain and the whirling waters of the cañon, but as soon as supper was -over Sam gave orders to have the things spread out and dried before the -fire. - -In this work all took an eager part, and as they had been able to -collect plenty of fuel, they were enabled to build such a fire as had -never chased the night shadows from that part of Grand River Cañon -before. - -When the blankets were dried they were spread over heaps of cedar boughs -and made beds that would have tempted a dyspeptic to sleep. - -But, though very weary, our friends did not lie down at once, but sat -before the fire speculating and wondering if they would be able to climb -out of the cañon on the morrow and make their way to Hurley's Gulch. - -Although there was no danger in this place from wild beasts or savage -foes, Sam Willett began to-night a system of guard duty which he kept up -during all the nights of his perilous journey. - -His great fear now was that the flood might rise and carry off the raft -or drown out their camping-place, as it was evident it had done on many -former occasions. - -That they might not be taken by surprise, he divided the night into four -watches, to begin at nine o'clock and to continue till five, when it -would be broad daylight. - -Each one was to stand guard two hours at a time and to wake the next one -when his watch had expired. The order was to be changed every night so -that no one would have to be on duty at the same time two nights in -succession. - -This arrangement met with the approval of all, and Sam took the first -turn on guard. - -The others lay down with the promptness of soldiers when the word of -command was given, and they were soon sleeping soundly. - -Sam had an excellent watch, the gift of his dead mother and valued -accordingly, and this enabled them to measure the time with military -exactness. - -The flood rose about a foot during the night, but beyond this, nothing -of a startling nature occurred. - -They breakfasted the following morning before it was quite light, and -when the glow of the rising sun could be seen on the crest of the peaks -that towered for many hundreds of feet above the bed of the stream, Sam -and Ulna started off to see if they could find a way to the upper world, -leaving Ike and Wah Shin in charge of the camp. - -These two worthies were the best of friends, and when together they -talked in a way that would have been very amusing to any one who could -have overheard it. - -"Dis am a mighty queah place," said Ike, glancing about him after Sam -and Ulna had got out of hearing. - -"A belly funny hole, way, way down flom wo'ld," said Wah Shin as he -imitated Ike's movements. - -"Wah Shin." - -"Go on chin, me heal you," said Wah Shin. - -"Do you t'ink God made all de world?" - -"Oh, me t'ink so," said Wah Shin carelessly. - -"An' eberyting He made 's got some use?" - -"Oh, yes, allee tings got some use--mebbe." - -"An' He made dese canyons?" - -"Don't know 'bout dem," said Wah Shin dubiously. - -"Wa'al, if God didn't make de canyons, who did?" asked Ike, with a -manner that indicated his appreciation of the great weight of the -question. - -To confess ignorance of a subject is a manly habit which very few are -addicted to. Wah Shin at once proved that he did not consider himself an -authority on all matters, for he said, promptly and frankly: - -"Me don't know." - -"Dey aint got no use, ez I ken see," continued Ike, "an' it's my farm -belief dat dat oder pusson ez goes roun' like a roarin' lion dug out -dese yer canawls an' den found ez he had no watah to fill 'em up wid." - -"Mebbe so--me don't know." - -"Now, if dey was filled wid fire," said Ike, with the same wise manner, -"I'd call it a fust-rate job--ob de kind." - -"Ha, ha!" roared Wah Shin, as if he caught the sharpest point of an -excellent joke. "'Spose alle file, den wat we do, eh?" - -"We wouldn't be har," said Ike. - -"But no cannee help oursels." - -"Reckon yer right. Ez atween de two, I goes in foh watah ebery day in de -week an' twice on Sundays. But if I'd had de buildin' ob dese yer -canyons I wouldn't hab wasted sich a mighty sight ob stone in puttin' in -de banks. But den eberyting in dis yer world ain't jest as we'd like to -have it, so it's better to take tings as dey come; what do you say, Wah -Shin?" - -"We gottee take it as it come--no can help oulsels," said Wah Shin -grimly. - -This phase of the situation was so self-evident that even Ike could not -think of objecting to it, so he began to whistle a hymn tune and to pack -up the food and blankets so that they might be all ready to start when -Sam and Ulna returned with the information that they had discovered a -way out of the cañon. - -But this hope, after having been strongly cherished for three hours, was -doomed to disappointment. - -Shortly before noon the two explorers returned, and though Sam's face -told of his failure, Ike could not help asking: - -"Wa'al, Mistah Sam, wat luck?" - -"Poor luck, Ike," was the sad reply. - -"Couldn't find de way out, eh?" - -"There is no way to find. Every wall we came to is as high and steep as -those about the camp," said Sam, with a sigh and an upward glance at the -perpendicular cliffs that appeared to be bending over them, as if the -touch of a child's hand might tumble them into the chasm. - -"Undah sich sarcumstances ez dem," said Ike, very solemnly, "wat do yeh -tinks best to be done?" - -"We must leave here at once." - -"But how's it to be did, Mistah Sam?" - -"We must leave as we came." - -"On de raft?" - -"Yes." - -"Wa'al, dat's a heap sight moah comfotable way dan if we had to swim foh -it," said Ike, with a sudden display of cheerfulness. - -Sam now began to realize that their stock of provisions was small, that -there was no way of replenishing them in the cañon, and that their stay -in these depths was very indefinite, if, indeed, the chances were not -all against their ever being able to get out. - -He saw that it would be a mistaken kindness if he let the others or -himself eat all that they desired, and great as his affection was for -Maj, the dog, he regretted that the animal was along, for it made -another and a very large mouth to feed. - -With force and frankness he laid the case before his companions, and -without a sign of dissent, they agreed to have the food so divided as to -make it last for ten days, before which time the least hopeful was -certain they would again be in the upper world. - -A dinner of limited rations was at once eaten, and though it was ample, -every one of them thought that he could easily eat as much more and not -feel that he was playing the glutton. - -Again the cargo was placed securely on the raft, and Maj walked demurely -on board and lay down on top of the blankets. - -After strengthening the raft by the addition of some pieces of light, -dry cedar, it was freed from its moorings and pushed into the current. - -The four passengers occupied the same relative positions as on the -previous day, Sam standing in the stern and skilfully steering the float -from the many angry-looking rocks that jutted into the swift current. - -As the light began to fade, Sam gazed eagerly in front and on either -side in the hope of being able to find some expansion or ledge on which -they could land for the night. But an impenetrable darkness settled over -them, and they were still afloat in the cañon. - - - - -CHAPTER X.--A NIGHT OF AWFUL GLOOM. - - -Words can convey to the reader an idea of only those things with which -he is familiar, or of which he can form a picture through his -imagination, and even when the latter is vivid it must draw largely for -its creation on things with which it is somewhat acquainted. - -No pen or tongue could properly describe the situation and the feelings -of the four human beings who through the long black hours of that night -whirled and drifted down through the black depths of the cañon. - -As it was useless to stand up and attempt to steer, for he could not see -his hand held close before his face, Sam Willett crouched down on the -raft, and clung with nervous hands to its trembling timbers. - -Now and then they seemed to be floating through quiet waters, but just -when hope came to cheer them with the belief that they had passed -through the most dangerous part of the current, the raft would be hurled -down long lines of rapids, or caught by some projecting rock it would be -sent spinning around with a velocity that made the occupants sick with -the whirling motion and the fear that the end had come. Such a situation -would have tested the strength of the most experienced nerves, even if -the midday sun was shining into the chasm, but the darkness added to its -terrors and filled the bravest with alarm. - -On and on, and on. It seemed to Sam that they were sinking into the -bowels of the earth, or flying away through the realms of night and the -abode of impenetrable darkness. - -Now and then he would look up at the few stars visible in the strip of -sky far overhead, to assure himself that he was yet in the world of life -and light. - -They were floating down a quiet stretch of water when Ike called out in -a tremulous voice. - -"Say, Mistah Sam, ken yeh heah me?" - -"Yes, Ike, I can hear," was the reply. - -"How does yeh feel, 'bout dis time?" - -"I feel hopeful, Ike." - -"Why does yeh feel dat way?" - -"It is my disposition," said Sam, for want of a better answer. - -"Got any ideah wot's de time?" - -"I have not, Ike." - -"How long does yeh tink it is since _de sun went down foh de last -time_?" - -"About eight hours," said Sam, though, judging by his own feelings, it -seemed like so many days. - -"Eight houahs!" exclaimed Ike. "Oh, Mistah Sam, yeh's away clar off de -track." - -"How long do you think it is since the sun went down?" asked Sam, for -the sound of their voices seemed to lighten the gloom. - -"Jest 'bout fifteen yeahs an' six months ago," said Ike, with the -greatest solemnity, adding quickly, "an' I don't tink de sun'll eber -rise agin. It's done gone gin out. My, if we could see our faces 'bout -dis yer time, do yeh know wot we'd find?" - -"What, Ike?" - -"Dat we've all growed up in de darkness, and dat we'z ole men." - -"Me not feel like ole man," said Wah Shin. - -"What do you feel like?" asked Sam, glad to hear them all speaking -again. - -"Me feel belly hungly," was the reply. - -"Patience, patience," cried out Ulna, from the forward part of the raft, -"God's sun is rising now." - -"Where!" was the exclamation of all. - -"In the east," said the young Ute. - -Not one of them could tell in what direction the east was, but all -turned their heads. - -Suddenly Ike called out: - -"Oh, I see a light in de sky!" - -At the same instant all saw it, high up and directly in front. - -The light looked like the glow of a wonderful fire opal, set in the inky -blackness of the sky. - -Brighter and brighter it grew each moment, till the reflected light -penetrated the profound depths of the cañon. - -It was the rising sun saluting the highest snow peaks of the mountains, -a section of which was visible in front. - -With the joy of the blind when the blessing of sight is restored, our -friends watched the increasing light coming down from the sky. - -Gradually the towering walls of the cañon became more distinct, till at -length their far-off summits could be seen, with here and there a cedar -clinging for dear life to the giddy ledges. - -"If dis yar day is gwyne to be ez long ez de last night," said Ike, when -he felt that the coming of the sun was not a false alarm, "why, I reckon -we'll all be ole men afore it gits dark agin." - -Even the dog gained courage by the coming of the day, and sitting up he -began to bark in a way that proved his interest in the world was -returning. - -There was no means of telling how far they had been borne by the current -during the long hours of that awful night, but as soon as it was light -again Sam took the pole and resumed his position as helmsman. - -As they were swept on he looked to the right and left in the hope of -finding a place where they might make a landing. - -They were wet, hungry and weary, but the coming sun revived their -drooping spirits. - -It was not till near noon that the precipitous walls expanded into an -area a quarter of a mile in diameter, that looked, in its flooded state, -like a subterranean lake. - -Here the current was much slower, and with Ulna's help, Sam succeeded in -gliding the raft to a ledge of sloping rocks, where it was made fast, -and again the passengers carried the cargo on shore. - -The sun shone on their landing place, which, being on the south bank of -the river, Sam decided to explore thoroughly in the hope of finding a -way out of the cañon, for he did not lose sight for a minute of his -father's trying situation. - -This expansion of the cañon walls was much greater than the one from -which they had come the day before, and there were so many recesses and -irregularities that getting out appeared to be an easy matter indeed. - -They spread their wet blankets and clothing on the rocks, and they found -enough drift-wood to make a fire, but all were so hungry that they did -not wait for the fire before eating. - -Wah Shin had some cooked food ready, and, although it had not been -improved by its long soaking, hunger made it very palatable. - -After the fire was started, Wah Shin and Ike, thoroughly exhausted, and -it may be more weary in feeling because unburdened with the -responsibility of the situation, lay down on the sun-heated rocks and -were soon asleep. - -"You must be tired also, Ulna. Lie down and I will look around and see -if I can find a way out of this," said Sam, laying his hand on the -handsome young Indian's shoulder. - -"I will not say that I could not lie down and go to sleep at once," -replied Ulna, "but if you are going to search I shall go with you. I -know how you feel about your father, and that thought is always in my -heart; so if you stay awake to work, I must do the same." - -[Illustration: _Sam succeeded in guiding the raft to a ledge of sloping -rocks._] - -The two youths shook hands, and after seeing that their rifles were in -order and loaded they slung them over their shoulders and started off. - -They clambered over huge masses of white sandstone rock that had fallen -in from the sides of the cañon, like the ruin of a giant's stronghold, -and at every step they could see by the drift-wood that the present -flood had been preceded by others much higher. - -Compared with the great pillars of stone scattered about them each was -impressed with the idea that his companion must have shrunk, he looked -in contrast with his surroundings so much smaller than usual. - -After much searching and climbing they came to a great rift in the cañon -wall that led up to the blue sky, and seemed to promise an outlet from -these awful depths. - -At the discovery Sam could not restrain a cry of joy, and even Ulna's -usually impassive face was illuminated with the light of hope. - -"I can see nothing to stop us!" said Sam, as with the activity of a -mountain lion he sprang up the defile. - -But it was three thousand feet to the top of the rift, and from their -position they could not see all the obstacles that lay in their way. - -But like the poet's Alpine climber, the motto was Excelsior!--higher -up--and with stout hearts they faced the unknown path that promised -access to the upper world and then to Hurley's Gulch. - -They clambered up and on, the way becoming narrower and steeper at each -step, while here and there their course was made difficult by huge -bowlders that had fallen in from above. - -After fully three hours hard work, and just when it seemed that a little -more exertion would take them to the summit, the cleft came to an end in -a precipice fully a hundred feet in height, though from the bottom it -looked only like a step that a child might overcome. - -Sam was so cast down by his discovery that he leaned against the side of -the cliff and pressing his hands to his eyes, he groaned: - -"Oh, my poor father, what will become of him! What will he think of my -absence?" - -"He will know that if you could you would come to him; and those who -keep him and Hank Tims prisoners need not to be told about the flood. -They will give us time to get back, I am sure they will give us time," -said Ulna, and he took Sam's hand and pressed it affectionately. - -They had made a bold attempt and failed, and now there was nothing left -but to make their way back to the place where they had left the raft -tied, and Ike and Wah Shin were sleeping on the rocks. - - - - -CHAPTER XI.--A TRYING SITUATION. - - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims were guarded by a number of the vigilantes, -and with these men, who appeared to be rough but honest fellows, they -talked about their trying situation. - -It will be remembered that Frank Shirley and Badger spent money freely -during that first rainy day in order to get the miners drunk, believing -that while they were in that state they could be led to destroy the -prisoners without even the appearance of a trial. - -In addition to making two-thirds of the men drunk, Shirley poisoned -their minds by telling them what a very bad man Mr. Willett had been in -Detroit, and he intimated, in a way more powerful than a direct -accusation, that he had poisoned his wife. - -The result of all this was that by the evening of that rainy day a great -mob, inflamed with liquor and driven into fury by lies, was shouting for -the lives of Mr. Willett and his companion. - -The guards not having been subjected to the influence of the bars were -calm and determined to do what they believed to be their duty. - -Soon after dark one of the guards, a tall, rugged man named Collins came -into the tent, and, turning up the lamp that hung from the pole in the -center, he said: - -"I'm afraid, gents, we are goin' to have trouble." - -"Trouble!" repeated Mr. Willett, as he rose from the blanket on which he -had been lying. "I don't see how our trouble can be increased." - -"I'll tell you how," said Collins, evidently very much excited. "You -know those of us here at Hurley's Gulch that are in for doin' about -what's right, want to give you gents a fair show." - -"That is what I want to believe," said Mr. Willett. - -"Well, I'm very much afeerd that things has took a change for the -worst." - -Collins hesitated, and Mr. Willett said: - -"For the worse! What do you mean?" - -"I mean that this man Frank Shirley, who says he's yer dead wife's -cousin, has made most of the men crazy drunk, for as it's been stormin' -and as the krik is up the boys couldn't work to-day. Then Shirley's give -out that he knowed you in Detroit, and that you was a very bad man back -there." - -"If you men knew this Shirley as well as I do," said Mr. Willett, his -brown cheeks flushing with indignation, "you would not believe him under -oath. But what has this to do with my case? Have they not agreed to wait -till my son comes here with the papers to prove I paid Edwards in full -for his claim at Gold Cave Gulch?" - -"Yes, they agreed to that when they was sober." - -"But, surely, Mr. Collins, they do not think differently now," said Mr. -Willett. - -"I'm afeerd they do. Hark! don't you hear 'em a-hollerin' and yellin' -and shootin' off their pistols?" - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims must have heard the noise even had their -hearing been less acute, for every minute it came nearer and nearer. - -"When men get drunk," said Hank, "they become brutes. But you are here -to guard us, an' you are sober an' have yer judgment an' senses about -you. Now, Mr. Collins, do you know what I'd advise?" - -"What?" asked Collins, who seemed at a loss what to do under the trying -circumstances. - -"Either protect us till we've had a trial, or else give us back our -rifles and pistols and let us protect ourselves. What do you say?" - -"I want to stand by you," said Collins, "but before I can 'gree to -anything I must see my friends." - -He hurried out, and, blending with the yelling of the intoxicated mob, -the prisoners could hear the low tones of men in earnest conversation -just outside the tent. - -"What do you think of the situation, Hank?" asked Mr. Willett, when they -were again alone. - -"I think it is mighty bad," was the reply. - -"But you surely do not think those men will shoot us down in cold -blood?" - -"They've done such things before. If they was only sober they'd do near -right as they know how, but they ain't. Just hear how they yell! Talk -about Injuns an' savages, a drunken white man is meaner and more -bloodthirsty than all of 'em put together. Ah! It'd be a heap sight -better world if thar was never a drop of whisky in it," and Hank sighed -and shook his head. - -He had but just ceased speaking when the flap of the tent was again -raised and Collins re-entered. This time he brought the rifles and -pistols that had been taken from the prisoners. - -"Here!" he said, "we've agreed not to let you be kilt without a show. -But we may git you to a place where you'll be safe till the mob has a -chance to cool down. Quick! put on these things and foller me." - -Mr. Willett and Hank fastened on their belts, and when they had done so, -Collins put out the lamp and led the way out of the tent. - -It was very dark outside and the rain had been followed by a fierce -gale. - -"Hang on to my arms, so's we won't git parted," said Collins as he -stepped between the two men whom he was gallantly determined to save -from the fury of the mob. - -They hurried on through the darkness, the yelling of the crowd gradually -dying out behind them. - -It seemed to Mr. Willett that they had walked several miles, and he was -wondering how their guide could be certain of his way in the inky -darkness, for from the time of starting he never hesitated for a moment, -when Collins came to a halt and said: - -"This is the place. Now foller behind me and be very keerful, for the -path is steep and slippery, and if you should chance to lose your -footin' you'd shoot into the creek whar the water's forty foot deep -'bout this time." - -Bracing themselves they followed Collins down a steep bank till they -came to the very edge of the seething torrent, then up along the uneven -shore they went for about a hundred yards and turned sharply to the -right. - -At length they found themselves standing before a rock and wondering -what would happen next. - -They were not long in doubt, for Collins lit a dark-lantern and its -glance of golden light revealed an opening in the rock very much like -the entrance to the old abode at Gold Cave Camp. - -"This is whar me and Si Brill, my pardner, hold out," said Collins as he -led the way into the cave. - -The place was somewhat contracted, but it had two beds, a fire-place and -cooking appliances, so that space was not a matter of any importance. - -"I must thank you, my friend," said Mr. Willett with a great sense of -relief, "and I hope to be able to prove to you before long that your -kindness and courage have been exercised for innocent men." - -"Yes," added Hank, "and for two men that would rather do a right, even -if it put them out of the way, than to think a wrong that paid big." - -"I'll stand by you," said Collins, "and you must stand by me, for if it -was knowed I fotched you har, them fellers would make short work of me -and Si Brill. Si's back at the tent and I must go and hunt him up. But -what I was a goin' to say is, don't try to light out. Stay har till we -can have a fair trial. You'll find lots of grub in this corral, and I -don't want you to be hungry. When your son comes over from Gold Cave -Camp, Mr. Willett, I'll fotch him to you at once. And now, good-night, -for I won't be back again before sun-up." - -"We certainly appreciate your kindness, Mr. Collins," said Mr. Willett -as he took the sturdy miner's hand, "and I can assure you that Hank and -I will remain here till you say we are free to leave." - -"And if we get well out of this scrape an' you should chance to be in -the same fix," said Hank, "you ken bet your last cent we'll stand by you -as one good man should stand by another." - -Putting out his lamp and warning them not to venture outside the cave -till they saw him again, Collins scrambled out and made his way back to -the tent in which the prisoners had been confined. - -He found that the canvas had been torn down and slashed to pieces with -knives in the hands of the furious mob. - -The shouting and the occasional pistol shots told that the mob had gone -back to the saloon, and while Collins was wondering whether he should go -there or not, he was joined by his partner, Si Brill. - -"What's up now, Si?" asked Collins. - -"I'm afeerd we're in for it," was the reply. - -"What do you mean?" - -"The mob believes we run the prizners off----" - -"They do, eh?" - -"Yes, and they swear if they ain't brought back by daylight, you and me -will have to fight for it." - -"Well," said Collins slowly, "they ken have a fight." - - - - -CHAPTER XII.--THE VOYAGE IS RESUMED. - - -When Sam Willett and Ulna returned to the camp they found Ike, Wah Shin -and the dog lying on the rocks near the dying fire. - -Although they had been sleeping for nearly five hours, it was with -difficulty that Ike could be aroused, and when he did sit up and rub his -eyes, he declared with laughable solemnity that he had only been asleep -a few minutes. - -"If you look at the sun I think you will see you are mistaken," said -Sam, pointing to the west. - -"Dat sun," said Ike, with the fine contempt of one who had lost all -faith in the luminary that rules the day; "I don't got no use foh it. -'Tain't like the sun we uster know way back at Detroit. Wy, sometimes he -gets up and hurries across the sky like a race-horse, an' sometimes he -don't get up foh weeks an' weeks. He's foolin' us, dat's all I got to -say." And Ike rose and yawned till he showed every tooth in his -capacious mouth. - -"I gottee heap muchee sleep, me no sleep mole foh twenty-one day," said -Wah Shin, who seemed determined not to agree with Ike in this matter. - -"If ebber I should get out of this yar scrape, an' I should hab lots of -money an' plenty ob time," said Ike with comical earnestness, "I'll go -off to some place whar it ain't dark most all de time, an' I'll sleep in -de sun foh weeks an' weeks an' weeks at a stretch, an' don't you forgit -it." - -As it was now about three o'clock in the afternoon Sam, after consulting -with Ulna, and recalling their experience of the night before, decided -not to launch their raft till the following morning. - -Wishing more than ever that he was a bird, Ike went off with Wah Shin to -gather fuel, and Sam and Ulna, both much exhausted, lay down to get a -little much needed sleep. - -When they closed their eyes the western sun was flooding the cañon with -a river of golden glory, when they woke up "night had let her sable -curtain down and pinned it with a star." - -A great fire was blazing near by, and Ike and Wah Shin were preparing -supper, while Maj sat licking his chops and eagerly watching the -operations. - -Sam had already divided the provisions, so that with care, "an' not -eatin' nigh's much as they felt like," to use Ike's words, they could -manage to live without much suffering for another week. - -After supper Ike startled the company by saying: - -"See heah, Mistah Sam, I'ze got an offer to make." - -"What is it, Ike?" - -Before proceeding Ike turned and pointed to the parcels containing their -little stock of food. - -"Ain't I de owner ob one-quarter ob dat grub?" - -"You shall have your share, Ike; but why do you ask?" said Sam, who half -guessed what was coming. - -"I've eat my share for to-night." - -"Yes, Ike." - -"An' I still feel as holler as a drum," and Ike rolled his eyes and -tightened his belt. - -"You have had as much as the rest," said Sam. - -"Oh, I ain't a complainin'; no one won't say, Mistah Sam, dat you don't -tote fair, but heah's de pint I wants to git at----" - -"Go on, Ike." - -"You let me have all my share now." - -"What would you do with it?" - -"Do wif it!" echoed Ike. "Wy, I'd sit right down an' gib it all a inside -passage. I'd a heap sight rudder hab one good, squar meal dan a hundred -scrimpsy ones. Dar ain't no pleasure in stoppin' jest when yeh wants to -keep right on eatin'." - -"Nevertheless we must all do it, Ike. We are not eating for pleasure, -but to keep alive till we get out of this place." - -"Wa'al, if we ebber does git out, an' I can sit down before grub an' eat -all I wants, dat grub will suffer--if I has any strent left," and Ike -sat down and watched Maj with a hungry look that boded no good to that -faithful creature. - -Sam had often been surprised at Ulna's gentle manners and the excellent -English he spoke; he seemed so little like the wild Indians he had read -about that he was anxious to know something of his life, but from -feelings of delicacy he had never asked him about his past up to this -time. By way of passing the time before setting the guard, he asked Ulna -where he had learned English so well. - -"In the Mission School at Taos," said Ulna. "My father, who was a -brother of our chief, Uray, was killed in the Sierra Madre Mountains, by -the Hill, or Arizona, Apaches, when I was a little child." - -"And your mother?" suggested Sam. - -"She could read and write, and she could speak Spanish and English as -well as the language of her own people; all this she had learned in the -school at Taos, to which place the good missionaries took her when she -was a child; that was long before the white man crowded into this land." - -"Is your mother living?" - -"Yes, and my sister; she is a year older than I, and she is very good. -Two years ago my mother, who still lived at Taos, married a white man--a -Mexican. I did not like him and I ran away and joined the tribe. But I -did not like the ways of our people, though I felt that their free life -on the hills and along the great rivers was the only one to live. Yes, I -have much of the white man's knowledge, and I am glad of it. Still, my -heart has ever hungered for the free life of the Ute. No matter what -befalls me, I do not complain; the Great Spirit rules and directs all," -and as Ulna ceased speaking, he uncovered his head and raised his -handsome, expressive face to the stars. - -"I thank you for telling me this," said Sam, taking the young Indian's -hand and pressing it warmly, while he added: "It does not make me love -you any the less or more, Ulna, but somehow I think that the more good -people know of each other the warmer friends they become." - -"Dem's my sentiments," said Ike, who looked as if he had been sleeping, -though he must have been wide awake. "Foh instants, when I didn't know -Mistah Sam, I didn't like him at all; but now dat I does know him -better'n any one in de world, w'y as a consekence I likes him a heap -sight more'n I does any one in de world." - -Sam had been inclined to feel angry with Ike when he spoke in the way he -did about dividing the food, but this little expression of genuine -sentiment on the black boy's part quite touched his heart, and he showed -his feeling by saying: - -"Ah, Ike, you may have a hungry stomach, but it cannot be truthfully -said that you haven't got a kindly heart." - -"Bimeby, mebbe, I tell you sometings all 'bout me, Wah Shin," said the -Chinaman, who felt that he must add something to the expressions of -good-fellowship. - -After a little further talk, in which they discussed the situation and -vainly tried to guess where they were, Sam gave the order in which the -guards should be called and handed his watch to Ike, whose turn came -first, and lay down on the blankets, which were quite dry and -comfortable by this time. - -To prove that Ike was not in the least selfish, though his display of -healthy-boy appetite might lead us to a different belief, it is but just -to him to say that when his two hours guard were up, he did not call -Sam, whose turn it was next, and who appeared to be sleeping very -soundly, but he stood the whole four hours on watch and then awoke Wah -Shin, and, after whispering to him what he had done added: - -"Mistah Sam's got the keer of all on his shoulders, an' he needs all de -sleep he kin git. W'y, I ken sleep any time; he can't, so I sez, let's -let him sleep his fill w'ile he's at it." - -They were up again before daylight, and the allowance of food for -breakfast made ready, a portion being set apart for Maj, for though the -dog was not at all a useful member of the little band, indeed, his -consumption of rations for one made him undesirable, yet Sam could not -find it in his heart to put the faithful creature out of the way. - -There was no need to discuss the course they should next take; there was -only one avenue that held out the promise of escape, and that was the -swift stream rushing by their resting place to an unknown landing. - -By this time all hands had become quite expert in loading and unloading -the raft, so that it did not take them long to get under way this -morning, each one in his accustomed place and Maj crouching down on the -blankets in the center. - -The rope was untied, and, with the pole in his hand, Sam stood up -behind, and again they were sweeping down on the red waters of this -wonderful river. - -As they drifted between the precipitous banks that seemed to grow higher -and higher with the passing of each bend, Sam recalled all he had ever -heard or read about the mighty Colorado of the West and its wonderful -cañon. He remembered that it was four hundred miles of continuous cañon -wall from the point where the Green and Grand Rivers united to the -Mormon settlement at Virgin River, where the cañon walls give place to a -wide valley. - -He shuddered but kept his thoughts to himself, for he wisely reasoned -that no good could result from frightening his companions by a true -picture of the dangers that lay before them. - -For himself he believed that there must be some opening by which they -could leave the cañon before traversing its length, and this hope was -not darkened with the thought that such an avenue of escape, if used, -might not better their condition. - -They drifted on till the middle of the afternoon, passing many side -cañons which it was impossible to enter, when they suddenly found their -raft swept by a whirling current, that boiled about them like the waves -of a storm-tossed sea. - -They looked up, to find that the towering gray walls had broken into -mighty pillars that rose for thousands of feet into the sky. - -It was the junction of the Green and Grand Rivers, and the piled up, -roaring and irresistible flood was caused by the coming together of the -two currents. - -The scene that presented itself at this point was indescribably sublime, -and even the dangers of the situation were forgotten for the moment in -the awful grandeur of their surroundings. - -Although Sam still stood bravely up, his pole was useless to control the -movements of the raft, which was borne with the speed of a swallow's -flight into the whirlpool, about which the waters circled and danced, as -if celebrating their meeting in these wild depths. - - - - -CHAPTER XIII.--WHIRLED AWAY. - - -As the raft was being swept into the whirlpool, Ike and Wah Shin sent up -a shriek of alarm that rose high above the roar of the waters, and Maj -crouched down lower on the blankets and moaned piteously. - -Ulna sat in his accustomed place. He did not make a movement, nor did -the expression of his face change as they were being whirled to what -seemed certain death. - -As nothing could be done to avert the impending catastrophe, Sam uttered -a prayer, drew in his pole to save himself from being swept off and then -sat as calmly and stoically down as if he were a young brave. - -There was a central vortex about which the waters swept with the speed -of a mill-stream, and for this point--as if forced on by an irresistible -power, the raft plunged. - -It seemed like going down a hill on a sled. Once fairly under way there -was nothing to stop it. - -With one quick glance from the center of the whirlpool to the pillars -piercing the sky, Sam closed his eyes expecting the next instant would -be the last. - -But instead of rushing down to death, he was called back to an interest -in his surroundings by feeling a peculiarly soothing, swinging sensation -in the raft. - -He opened his eyes and looked about him, and to his unutterable surprise -they were being swept about the mighty whirlpool, like a ball at the end -of a string in a strong man's hand. - -Nearer and nearer to the center, until it seemed that the fraction of a -second must bring the fatal plunge, and then the raft would be suddenly -flung to the outer edge of the whirlpool again. - -"Golly!" exclaimed Ike, as he looked about him and winked very fast, -"dis am curus." - -"Too muchee, swing, swing!" cried Wah Shin, as the raft hung again on -the edge of the vortex, only to be hurled a second time to the outer -edge. - -This swinging was at first a decidedly pleasant sensation, but soon it -made the passengers on the raft giddy and then quite sick. - -It was only by keeping their eyes shut that they could command their -senses. - -A half an hour of this whirling to the center and being thrown back to -the edge continued, though it seemed much longer to the tortured -occupants of the raft, and Sam spoke his thoughts rather than addressed -any of his companions when he said: - -"Will this go on forever?" - -"It do look to me powahful-like's if we was a-gwine to sikle round dis -yar place foheber an' eber, amen," said Ike. - -Sam looked up again at the sky, and the crimson hue of the clouds told -him that the sun would soon sink in the upper world and that darkness -would soon come to add to their trials. - -He felt that whether the raft was swallowed up or continued to swing in -that giddy dance till morning would make but little difference to -himself or his companions, for in either case death would come before -morning. - -His brave heart grew heavy, as if the darkness of descending night were -falling on it. - -He thought of his dead mother, thought of the imprisoned father, whom he -had set out so heroically to save, and the death that threatened was -only awful to him because he was to see his father nevermore. - -While these thoughts were running through his mind he felt a different -movement in the raft. This was followed by a cheer from Ike and Wah Shin -and the loud barking of the dog. - -Sam looked quickly up. - -Joy! joy! In some inexplicable way the raft had been hurled so far -beyond the circle of the whirlpool's power as to be caught by the -current and carried into the Colorado, which here begins its journey -under that name, for the Gulf of California. - -Even Ulna was roused from his usual stoicism by the change. Pointing to -the right, where in the twilight a low peninsula could be seen jutting -into the river, he called to Sam: - -"Let us steer for that point. I think we can make a landing there." - -"All right," replied Sam with his habitual cheerfulness. - -Ulna now took up his own pole, and after much effort they succeeded in -getting the raft to the low point, and here, without difficulty, they -made a landing. - -As there was neither tree nor rock to tie to they pulled the raft high -up on the strip of beach, and then looked around, but without success, -for the means to make a fire. - -It was too dark to see ten feet away, so they sat on the rocks after -making the discovery that what they supposed to be a peninsula was -really an island. - -But they made another discovery at the same time that was destined to -affect their progress very seriously, and that was that one-half the -provisions had in some way been pushed or slipped from the raft; but -they were lost, and hunger, or rather, starvation was only a few days -off. - -They ate a little of their remaining provisions and then spread the -blankets on the low, damp ground. - -Sam Willett had a military idea of the value of discipline. Having begun -with having guards at night, he determined to keep it up till the end. - -The wisdom of this precaution was shown before another sun came to -banish the shadows. - -About an hour before daylight Ulna, who was then watching, discovered -that the flood was rising around them, and hastily awoke his companions. - -They sprang up to find the water roaring about them, and Sam, holding -the raft to keep it from floating off, ordered the others to bundle up -the blankets and get all the things on board. - -As soon as this was done they pushed the raft into deeper water, got on -board and were at once swept away by the current. - -Such trials would have crushed the spirits of any but the bravest, and -with a less resolute leader than Sam, despair would have made the others -indifferent to their surroundings. - -While it was yet as dark as midnight in the cañon, they could look up -and see pink streaks in the far-off sky that told them the light of -another day was again flushing the upper world. - -But the sun only looked into this gloomy abyss for one short hour in the -twenty-four, and then left it to the gathering shadows and impenetrable -night. - -It was ten o'clock by Sam's watch when they found a ledge of rocks on -which they could make a landing. - -This haven was discovered none too soon, for the severe straining the -raft had had in the whirlpool had loosened the cords that held the logs -and they threatened to come apart and let all into the water. - -The remaining food was very much soaked, but their appetites were keen -enough to eat the whole of it just as it was. - -Two more days would see all of their provisions gone, and, realizing -this fact, Sam proposed dividing what was left so as to last over three -days, but against this arrangement Ike and Wall Shin entered a protest. - -"Now, Mistah Sam," said Ike, "I ain't got nigh so much sinse as you has, -but it'd been a heap sight bettah if you jest took my edvice." - -"Your advice about what, Ike?" asked Sam. - -"'Bout dat grub." - -"What about it?" - -"I proposed, night afore last, we should all go in and eat all we -could--now, didn't I?" - -"I believe, Ike, you did say something like that." - -"An' you said 'no;' so w'at's the consekence?" - -"The consequence is, Ike, that you obeyed me then, and I expect you to -obey me still," said Sam firmly. - -"Yes; an' I'll keep on obeyin' you till I die, but har's de pint," and -Ike spread out his hand and looked at the palm as if he were reading. -"If we'd hab eat a lot more ob dat grub, den dar wouldn't have been so -much lost. Wouldn't it be a heap sight better if we had dat stuff inside -ob us dan at de bottom ob dat ar whirlpole?" - -"We did everything for the best, Ike, and therefore we should not blame -ourselves," said Sam. - -"I no tinkee dat glub's in watel," said Wah Shin. - -"Whar is it, den?" asked Ike. - -"I tink Maj he lookee muchee fat. Him no so hungly like befole; mebbe -him eatee glub." - -The object of this awful accusation sat near by eyeing the little stock -of provisions as if he could dispose of the lot without feeling any -great discomfort. - -"No," said Ulna, who usually listened to these conversations without -taking part in them; "the dog did not eat that food." - -"W'y you tinkee no?" asked Wah Shin. - -"Because the bag in which the food was placed is gone, and the dog could -not have eaten that." - -"Me no so shule bout lat," said Wah Shin. "W'en dog him heap hungly him -eat bag too." - -Clearly Ike and Wah Shin had formed a conspiracy against the dog, and -this only confirmed Sam in his attachment to the poor brute, though more -than once he wished that he was in some other place. - -Sam and Ulna at once set about repairing the raft, and while they were -engaged in this work Ike showed that he had unbounded faith in his young -master's knowledge by asking these questions: - -"Mistah Sam, w'at you tink bout dis time?" - -"Nothing, Ike," was the reply. - -"Know 'bout whar we is?" - -"I do not." - -"Know whar we'z goin'?" - -"No." - -"Nor whin we'll git dar?" - -"No." - -"Eber heah ob sich a fix?" - -"Never." - -"If we gits out ob dis yeh won't neber want to try anudder sich scrape, -I reckon?" - -"No." - -"Ye've had enough?" - -"Yes." - -"So has I, but dar's no use a gibbin' up so, Mistah Brown!" and then -with a sudden change of manner that startled all hands, the dog -included, Ike sang out in a rich tenor voice. - - "Oh fust was made de sun, - An' den was made de sky, - An' den dey made de earf - An' hung it up to dry, - An' den de made de star, outer yalla gals' eyes - Foh to gib a little light - W'en de sun don't rise." - - - - -CHAPTER XIV.--ORDER AND DISORDER. - - -The storm died out over Hurley's Gulch, and except for the high current -in the creek there was nothing to indicate that the land had been -recently deluged. - -The bluest of cloudless skies bent over the landscape; the verdureless -rocks glistened in the light of the sun, as if they had recently been -subjected to a furnace heat instead of being drenched by a flood. - -The lines of the Sierra Madre Mountains, to the east, were so clear and -sharply defined that they seemed to be but a short walk away instead of -being seventy miles. - -Only the ragged tents and dilapidated cabins showed the effects of the -storm; perhaps we should include the crowd of red-eyed miners, who, with -the evidences of unbridled dissipation on their faces, crowded about the -principal saloon. - -Frank Shirley and Badger were disappointed in the work they had planned -for the night before. - -They had spent much money and time in working the mob up to a pitch of -unreasoning and brutal frenzy, and yet nothing had been done. - -"'Tain't the boys' fault," said Badger, as on the following morning he -and Frank Shirley walked along the banks of the creek. - -"Whose fault is it, then?" asked Shirley, sulkily. - -"Why, it's the fault of them other two fellers--Collins and Brill--that -was sot to guard the prizners; they ain't no good; they've gone clar -back on us," said Badger, with an angry light in his single eye. - -"Well, I left the management to you, and I don't understand why you -failed," said Shirley, who evidently felt that the man he had employed -to do his vile work was not keeping his part of the contract. - -"If a man don't win first time is he agoin' to give up and never try -again?" and Badger answered his own question by adding: "Not if he's got -the right kind of stuff in him." - -"But what are we to do next? You see, I must have this man out of the -way. If he lives then I have no show to get the fortune." - -"I thought it all depended on the boy's livin'." - -"So it does, but you know our plan." - -"I do that, and I'm goin' to stick to it. Don't lose patience; this yar -world wasn't made in a day. Time is allers well-spent on a big job." - -By this time they had come in their walk to the tent in which the -prisoners were confined the night before. - -The tent, as has been said, lay torn on the ground, but the knives of -the mob and not the storm had made the rents. - -Collins and Brill, both seemingly very angry, were talking to a lot of -the miners when Badger pushed through the crowd and said: - -"You two is purty guards." - -"We didn't ask your opinion," said Brill, hotly. - -"Still I feel like givin' it. Whar's the prizners?" - -"They are safe," said Collins. - -"Safe whar?" - -"In my charge." - -"But whar have you hid 'em?" - -"Where a lot of drunken ruffians can do them no harm till they have had -a fair trial," said Brill. - -"Drunken ruffians!" retorted Badger, with a cool effrontery that won the -admiration of his employer, "we ain't murderers at any rate. And if we -did want to do for them two, that you've hid away in yer dugout, as I -believe, it was to prevent others from doin' like 'em. When you are a -savin' of them, you'd orter think of poor Tom Edwards, as is dead and -buried." - -"I started out to see that them two men had a fair trial," said Collins, -stoutly, "and I'm goin' to do it. We've sent other messengers for that -boy with the paper, and if he don't show up with it, why then, I'll be -in for trial. But let me warn you fellers that there's men in this camp -that means to see fair play, and if you don't like our way of doin' -business, Badger, just step to one side and say so to me, and I'll give -you all the chance you want to larn who's best man." - -As Collins spoke he laid his hand on the stock of his pistol and there -was a set to his firm lips and a light in his keen gray eyes that there -was no mistaking. - -Like all of his class, Badger was at heart a very great coward, and he -proved it now. - -"Oh!" he exclaimed, in a voice that trembled perceptibly, "I don't want -to quar'l with you. I'm in for doin' what's right. But I tell you this, -Collins, and you mark my words, that boy of Willett's ain't agoin' to -show up in this camp with no paper." - -"We'll see about that," said Collins. - -"I'm willin' to bet on it," said Badger. - -"Have you got money to bet?" - -"Yes, I have." - -"Then my advise to you, Badger, is to start off and pay your debts -instead of gambling with other people's money," and with this caustic -shot, Collins turned on his heel and walked away with his partner, -Brill. - -They had gone about fifty yards when Badger shouted after them: - -"See har, Collins!" - -"What is it?" asked Collins looking over his shoulder. - -"How long are we to wait for the trial?" - -"I told you till Mr. Willett's son comes." - -"A day?" - -"On account of the floods it may take three days." - -"Say three days then." - -"Wa'al, if it will make you fellers easier, I'll say three days!" - -"And then the trial?" - -"Yes." - -"Boy or no boy?" - -"Boy or no boy," replied Collins. - -"And if they're found guilty?" - -"Then me an' Brill will be in for punishin them as much as any man in -your gang. Meantime it might be better if you fellers shut down on -drinkin'." - -With this very sensible opinion Collins and Brill, each active and tall -and with a rifle at his back, started off in the direction of their -dugout. - -They told Mr. Willett and Hank Tims what had happened, and Brill added: - -"You're purty safe for three days, Mr. Willett, yet if I was you I don't -think I'd leave this place or run the risk of meeting any of the gang -drunk." - -These miners, like all brave fellows, were gentle and generous to the -two men whom they took pains to treat as guests, so that they might -forget that they were prisoners. - -The day following the events just narrated the man who had been sent by -the vigilantes to Gold Cave Camp to hurry up Sam Willett with the -all-important paper, came back on a weary horse, bringing with him a -very startling report. - -The instant he dismounted before the canvas hotel he was greeted from -all sides by queries like these: - -"Got back, Ned?" - -"Wot's the news?" - -"Whar's the boy?" - -"Wouldn't he come?" - -"You found thar wasn't any paper to fetch?" - -When the messenger had recovered his breath and the silence abated, he -replied to all these questions in one sentence: - -"Thar wasn't no one at the caves!" - -"No one!" shouted a number. - -"Not a livin' soul." - -"Whar had they gone?" asked Badger. - -"The flood must have drowned 'em all out," said the messenger. - -"Did it rise as high as the caves?" asked one. - -"Yes; clear up to the top." - -"But they mout have got off afore the flood riz?" said Badger. - -"Wa'al," was the reply, "if they did git off, they must have gone inter -hidin', for I sarched and sarched, and didn't see hair nor hide, nor -sign nor trace of 'em." - -This news startled every one, but it brought intense pleasure to two. - -As soon as Frank Shirley and Badger could go off without attracting -attention, they withdrew from the crowd, and the former asked: - -"What do you think of the news, Badger?" - -"Couldn't be better," said Badger. - -"Think the boy's drowned?" - -"He must be." - -"But might he not have escaped?" - -"How?" - -"In a boat or on a raft." - -"Wa'al," laughed Badger, "they didn't have no boat, and if they tried a -raft, why that'd be the same as committin' suicide." - -"What do you mean?" - -"I mean that I've knowed of men as got into the great cañon of the -Colorado, but no one knows of any that came out on a raft. The boy's -dead as a door nail by this time, and you're a rich man," said Badger, -reaching out his hand. - - - - -CHAPTER XV.--THE PROVISIONS ALL GONE. - - -When the raft was repaired, the blankets, arms, and little stock of food -were put on board and securely fastened, each one took his accustomed -place, with Maj in the middle, and the voyage was resumed. - -How far they had come, Sam had no means of telling, he only knew to his -sorrow that he was being borne further and further away from his father. - -Without this awful anxiety on his mind, the situation would have been -sufficient to shake the nerves and courage of a strong man. - -The brave youth felt that he was not only battling in these depths for -his own life, but for the lives of those whom fate had thrown with him -on this most thrilling voyage. - -He fully realized the situation, and the fortitude with which he faced -it redounds the more to his credit. - -They were on a shaky raft at the bottom of the mightiest gorge in all -the world. - -Even if they could reach the top, they would find themselves in the -midst of an arid, trackless desert, cut up by other cañons, across which -naught but the mountain eagle could pass in safety. - -The hunger, ever gnawing at his vitals, kept before him the fact that -their provisions were nearly out. - -If by dying, Sam could save his beloved father and return to safety his -companions in these trials, he would not have hesitated about facing -death; but as it was, he determined to do his full duty while his -strength lasted, though no eye but God's appreciated the effort he was -putting forth. - -The cañon through which they were now passing, had the highest walls -they had yet seen. For more than a mile their glistening gray sides shot -up to the thin belt of dark blue sky, their summits crowned with -pinnacles that in comparison would dwarf the highest and noblest -structure ever built by human hands. - -As if resting after their mad dance in the whirlpool, the waters flowed -calmly and silently down, yet with a speed that told Sam they were -moving at the rate of about four miles an hour. - -The most wonderful thing about these depths was the dim twilight, and -long before the sun went down in the upper world, the stars were visible -from the bottom of the cañon. - -As night approached the passengers scanned the shores eagerly, and -looked ahead to every bend in the tortuous river, hoping they might be -able to find a strip of shore or a ledge of rocks on which to make a -landing, but in vain. - -"It don't look's if dar was any more shoah," said Ike, in a loud, -frightened tone, that echoed from rock to rock for nearly a minute after -he had spoken. - -"Not within sight," said Sam, with affected cheerfulness. - -"Den wat's we to do?" - -"We must keep on." - -"On de raft?" - -"The only chance is between that and the water." - -"Dat's so," said Ike, solemnly. - -"Too muchee watel, too lillee glub; no likee dis fix belly muchee," said -Wah Shin. - -"You must try and rest as best you can," said Sam. "Ulna and I will take -turns in steering the raft." - -"All night, Mistah Sam?" - -"Yes, Ike, all night." - -"Den you done lost faith in dis chile?" - -"I have not. Why do you ask?" - -"Coz, Mistah Sam, I ain't agoin' to sleep while you weah yorself out. I -may be purty mean, but I ain't nigh so mean as dat. I ken steer in de -dark as well as de next man, an' I'm agoin' fer to try, if so be you -don't objeck." - -"Me, too; allee same like Ike. Me no steels so well likee me cookee, but -I tly, too," said Wah Shin. - -"I am glad to see, boys," said Sam, feeling stronger for the spirit -shown by his two most dependent companions, "that you are willing to do -your part. If we come out all right, as I believe we shall, it will be -because we never felt like giving up." - -"Dem's my sentiments," said Ike, heartily. - -"Me say allee same likee dat," joined in Wah Shin, who showed that he -was coming out strong as their trials increased. - -Ulna spoke not a word, but in the dim and fading light his dark face -glowed with a pride and pleasure more eloquent in its expression than -words. - -To show that he appreciated their efforts, and with the belief that it -would be better for all, if each was made to feel that he had an -important share of the responsibility on his shoulders, Sam decided that -they should take turns in steering during the night, in the same order -that they would if on guard. - -These arrangements were hardly completed when the impenetrable darkness, -to which no mortal with eyes could ever grow accustomed, came down on -the cañon. - -Sam had matches in a water-proof case, and with the help of these and -his watch they were enabled to mark the hours during that long, dreary -night. - -During the watches of heavy, painful darkness, the raft swept swiftly -and silently on, meeting with no mishap but giving to its occupants the -impression that they were falling down, down through the depths of a -rayless and fathomless space. - -When it became light enough to see the next morning, Sam noticed that -all his companions looked older, and he reasoned that this was due to -hunger, mental anxiety and want of sleep. - -Even in the days of plenty, Ike was always ready to eat, and, as we have -seen, the desire for more food was ever on his mind, from the hour when -Sam thought it prudent to limit the rations. - -From the moment it was light enough to see he kept his eyes fastened on -the little bag containing their remaining stock of provisions. It was -evident, from the expression of his mouth, that he was trying to -restrain his feelings, but unable to resist, he at length exclaimed: - -"See heah, Mistah Sam!" - -"What is it, Ike?" asked Sam, who already guessed what was coming. - -"How does yeh feel 'bout dis time?" - -"Pretty well, Ike; how are you?" - -"I'ze mighty holler!" groaned Ike, and he pressed his hand over his belt -and bent himself forward in a most comical way. - -"Hungry, Ike?" - -"Hungry!" repeated Ike, "dat ar' word don't nigh begin foh to 'spress -jest how I feel." - -"Cheer up, Ike; we'll find a landing-place presently, and then we'll -have something hot." - -"W'en a feller's as holler an' hungry as I am, he ain't so mighty -partickler whedder do grub's hot or cole. De question wif him is, is dar -enough to fill up all de emptiness." - -"Very true, Ike----" - -Sam's sentence was cut short by an exclamation from Ulna, who had risen -to his feet and was pointing to a line of shore on the left, where grew -a cluster of stunted bushes. - -They succeeded in getting the raft to this point and made a landing -without any difficulty. - -Here they found a great quantity of drift-wood, and Wah Shin and Ike -started a fire while Sam and Ulna, with an eye to the future, selected -some stout pieces of timber with which to strengthen their raft. - -"Don't you t'ink," asked Ike as he pointed to their little stock of -food, "dat dar ain't no use in makin' two bites ob a cherry?" - -"Why do you ask that, Ike?" - -"Coz, dar ain't more'n nuff grub dar foh one right-down, honest, squar -meal, an' if us was to eat it, we'd all feel a heap sight bettah." - -"But the future, Ike?" - -"Wa'al, sah, I ain't hungry in de futah; Ize hungry right jest now at -dis bressed minute." - -"Me feel allee same like dat," said Wah Shin. - -As this was exactly how Sam and the uncomplaining Ulna felt, the former -gave orders to warm up all the food and divide it into five shares, one -of which was to be for Maj. - -They had a good supply of coffee left and a few pounds of bread with a -like quantity of meat. - -We shall not attempt to describe that feast. Only those who have long -endured the pangs of hunger can appreciate it. - -Each one rose from the banquet much relieved and refreshed, and in their -enjoyment of the present they quite lost sight of the fact that their -last particle of food was gone. - - - - -CHAPTER XVI.--DANGER AHEAD. - - -After their last hearty meal, which finished up the provisions, Sam -Willett and his friends felt better, stronger and warmer than they had -since the beginning of this wonderful voyage. - -It is one of the blessings and charms of youth that while it enjoys the -present and anticipates the happiness of the future, it steadily ignores -all thoughts of coming afflictions. - -Ike was boisterous in his hilarity; he danced about the fire, as if "the -squar meal" had had an intoxicating effect on him; and, at length, -unable to restrain himself, he burst into the following snatch from an -old plantation song: - - "Oh! don't you know Miss Dinah Crane, - She's 'gwine to be married; - Glad am I, an' dat's a fac, - For berry long she's tarried. - - "So fotch along de wine an' de hoe cake too, - De gumbo an' de cream, - An' don't fergit de weddin' cake - On wich we darkies dream! - - "For we will larf an' sing all day, - Hooraw, hooraw, hooraw! - An' on de banjo sweetly play - With a zip, yaw, yaw--yaw, yaw!" - -Even Ulna smiled at this performance, and Maj chased his tail and barked -till the cañon walls rang with the echoes. - -The strip of shore, on which they were encamped, extended from their -landing place for some distance down the river, so before launching the -raft again, Sam thought it would be well for Ulna and himself to make an -examination as far as they could do so on foot. - -Taking their rifles, which were loaded with metallic cartridges that the -water could not injure, they started off, first telling Ike and Wah Shin -to take advantage of their absence to get some sleep. - -They walked and clambered along the shore for about half a mile, when -there came to their ears a hoarse, deep, monotonous roar. - -"What is that?" asked Sam, coming to a sudden halt and laying his hand -on Ulna's arm. - -"I don't know," was the quiet reply. - -"From what direction does the sound come?" - -"From down the river." - -"It must be the water?" - -"There is nothing else to make a noise down here." - -"I once heard the roar of the great fall at Niagara, and that brings it -to my mind. Let us move on," said Sam. - -Again they resumed their journey. - -At times they were forced to creep along the edge, knee deep in water, -but they did not mind this. - -After going about three hundred yards further down, they came to an -irregular rock, up whose sides they climbed in the hope of getting a -better view of the river below. - -They were not disappointed in their purpose, but the prospect that met -their gaze was well calculated to dismay the stoutest heart. - -Their vision was limited by a bend in the river a quarter of a mile -below, but between this and the rock on which they stood, the water was -white with foam as it roared and tumbled over a series of rapids, in the -midst of which black rocks appeared like the heads of monstrous -creatures. - -This sight was so appalling that neither Sam nor Ulna could utter a word -for some seconds, but stood looking from the maddened waters into each -other's frightened face. - -Sam was the first to speak: - -"Oh, Ulna, that is awful!" - -"Bad," was the laconic reply. - -"What are we to do?" - -"I cannot tell." - -"We can't go back the way we came?" - -"No," said Ulna, and he emphasized this opinion by a vigorous shake of -the head. - -"We can't get out by climbing up the walls?" - -"I wish we could," said Ulna. - -"Then," continued Sam, "there are only two courses open to us." - -"Only two." - -"One is to try and go down the rapids on the raft." - -"And the other," added Ulna, "is to remain where the raft now is and -starve to death." - -"And have you a choice, Ulna." - -"Yes, I have." - -"What is it?" - -"If I am to die, I want to die resisting." - -"Then you are for trying the rapids?" - -"I am; but I shall do as you say." - -"I say 'go on.'" - -Sam reached out and took Ulna's hand, and so they stood for some minutes -looking at the frightful rapids which they had decided to face. - -It was now about noon, there was fully five hours of daylight left, and -they decided to avail themselves of it to test the rapids. - -Sam reasoned that the thing had to be done, and the sooner the -experiment was made the better, and in addition to this he knew that -there was no more food left, and that from this time on himself and his -companions would grow weaker and weaker for the effort. - -They turned to walk back, Sam clambering along the giddy ledge of the -rock which rose straight up from the water. He was a few yards in -advance of Ulna, for whose immediate safety he had no fear, when he was -brought to a sudden stand, and his heart stopped beating, and the cold -sweat came out on his forehead at hearing a short, quick cry of alarm -behind him. - -The cry was followed by a splash, and turning, Sam saw that Ulna had -fallen from the rock into the fierce current that roared and foamed -above its base. - -Sam threw aside his rifle and sprang back to the rescue of the young -Indian, but before he had gone ten feet Ulna was fifty yards away, -bravely battling with the maddened waters, above whose roar came the -words: - -"God bless you! Farewell!" - -Sam stood petrified with horror. - -To plunge into the water and attempt to help Ulna in that way would be -madness. - -Even as Sam watched he could see the brave face becoming more and more -indistinct as it rose and fell on the surges, and then with a wave of -the arm vanished out of sight behind the distant bend of the river. - -Overcome with his emotions, Sam sat down on the rock, and pressing his -hand to his eyes, he cried as if his heart was breaking. - -It was not for himself he grieved, nor would it be just to say that -these tears were an evidence of weakness in the character of our brave -young friend. - -He loved the handsome Indian youth, as he might have loved a brother; -but this awful loss came with the memory of his other trials, so that -his emotion was a proof of his loyal heart and gentle nature. - -The man or boy who is incapable of tears, it is safe to say, is also -incapable of a noble feeling. - -Believing that Ulna had gone down the mad river to his death, Sam, as he -sat there, recalled that he owed a duty to the living. - -Slinging his rifle on his back again, he retraced his steps to camp. - -He found Ike, Wah Shin and the dog, all sleeping by the fire as -peacefully as if they were on downy beds in the midst of civilization. - -Maj leaped up barking with joy and began to fawn on his young master. - -This awoke Ike and Wah Shin, the former of whom declared as usual that -he had only just closed his eyes, "an' hadn't been asleep at all." - -"We must make ready to start at once," said Sam. "Get the things on -board and tie them securely." - -"All right, sah," said Ike, and he went to work with the energy of one -who had dined abundantly and slept well. - -"Ulna, whele him go?" asked Wah Shin, stopping in the midst of loading -the raft and looking about. - -"He has gone down the river," said Sam, and his sad face told the -Mongolian that something serious had happened. - -"Him no gone gettee dlownded," gasped Wah Shin, and his eyes grew more -oblique with alarm. - -"Drownded!" cried Ike. "Why, Ulna kin swim like a whole flock of ducks -in a mill pond." - -"The river is very rough ahead," said Sam, "and after Ulna fell into the -rapids he could not get back." - -"An' whar did he go to?" asked Ike. - -"Down the river." - -"To de bottom?" - -"I don't know." - -"Golly!" exclaimed Ike, "if de ribber's as rough as dat, den we'd bettah -stay whar we is." - - - - -CHAPTER XVII.--MR. WILLETT LEARNS THE NEWS. - - -Collins, and his partner, Brill, were at heart as tender as they were -brave. - -They reasoned that Mr. Willett should know the news the messenger -brought back from Gold Cave Camp, yet neither felt like conveying it to -the unhappy man. - -"Somebody's got to tell him," said Brill, to his partner, "and as you've -got the best gift of gab, Collins, I reckon you're the feller to do it." - -"If it comes down whar I've got to speak my mind and tell a sneakin' -feller jest what I think of him," replied Collins, "I ain't slow, and I -find I'm flush of words 'bout that time, but tellin' a man his son's -dead, and that that 'ar paper he sent for to save his own life, ain't -agoin to be perduced, why, that's an entirely different matter, and I'd -a sight rather contract out the job to some chap as don't mind sich -things." - -"See har, pard, I've got an idear." - -"Let's have it," said Collins, much relieved. - -"I think we'd better do this kinder by slow degrees like. What do you -say?" - -"Why, I say, Brill, ole feller, I don't catch on to the drift of your -ore bed," said Collins. - -"I mean through Hank Tims." - -"What about him?" - -"We must get him to one side, kinder." - -"And what then?" - -"Why then we must up and tell him the hull story." - -"I see yer pint, Brill." - -"And then," continued Brill, "he can give it to Mr. Willett, and that'll -kinder let us out of the scrape." - -In token of his approval of this very excellent plan, Collins shook -hands with his partner, and then Hank Tims was called outside of the -dugout. - -The partners were still in doubt as to which of them should tell the -story, and noticing that they stood looking at each other Hank asked: - -"Is there any fresh trouble up, pards?" - -"Wa'al, yes, kinder," said Collins, taking upon himself the painful -duties of spokesman. - -"Let's have it," said Hank, stoutly. "Neither me nor Mr. Willett is -skeered to hear the worst." - -"Jest so," said Collins, "and so we thought we'd better give you the -news and let you break it to him." - -"What news?" asked Hank. - -"Why the news that's come from Gold Cave Camp." - -"Wa'al, let's have it." - -"You know, Hank, we sent a messenger to Gold Cave Camp when we found the -storm was onto us, and Mr. Willett's son hadn't showed up with that -paper." - -"Yes, I heard of that, Collins." - -"Wa'al, the man's back----" - -"And the boy--Sam Willett?" cried Hank. - -"Couldn't be found," stammered Collins. - -"Why not?" - -"He wasn't thar." - -"No," added Brill, "he wasn't no whar in sight." - -"And the other folks, the black boy, the Chinee and the young Ute, Ulna, -what came here with me an Mr. Willett and went back again when we was -took prizners?" - -"No one knows; they wasn't in sight." - -"Drownded out!" gasped Hank. - -"No, the folks think they tried to git away by swimmin' or making a -raft," said Collins. - -"They might as well try to fly. Ah, this is bad news; mighty bad news. -I'd rather die mysel', and I know Mr. Willett would rather die a -thousand times over than to lose that boy. Did you ever see young Sam -Willett, gents?" - -The partners shook their heads and said they never had seen young Sam -Willett. - -"Wa'al," continued Hank, with a sob in his voice, "he wasn't what you -and me mout think a full-growed man, but never a braver nor a handsomer -lad ever crossed them Sierras off thar to the east. He was a gentleman, -young Sam was, from the ground up; he couldn't think anything mean, much -less do it. Ah, why should men like you, and me, and others be left and -him be took? I don't see how I can bring mysel' to tell his father, for -he was all Mr. Willett had left, and he won't keer any more for life -when he hears this." - -"It's mighty tough on the old man," coughed Brill, "not to mention his -other troubles; but as he's got to know it sooner or later, my pard and -me thought you'd better tell him." - -"Wa'al, if I must I 'spose I must; but I tell you what, boys, I'd jest -as soon you'd order me out to be shot. In fact I'd a heap sight rather -be shot, if I was only sure that my dyin' would bring back young Sam -Willett to life." - -Brushing his sleeve across his eyes, Hank turned away to hide his -feelings, and the partners went silently back to the cluster of tents -and buildings that was known as "the camp." - -We have already seen something of the love that existed between Mr. -Willett and his son. - -Apart from the affection natural to their relationship, these two were -still more strongly attached to each other by the fact that they were -alone in the world and the exclusive object of each other's most -profound affections. - -We shall not attempt to describe the manner in which Hank Tims -communicated the news to the already much afflicted father, but it -should be said that he acquitted himself with a tenderness hardly to be -expected from one of his rough exterior and rude life. - -There are blows so crushing to the human heart that they fall without -being followed by a sign of pain or a cry of agony. - -The sting of a bee will call out a shout from the strongest man, but the -bullet that taps the fountain of life is received with ashy but silent -lips. - -All the color left Mr. Willett's face, and he fell back on the blankets -on which he had been sitting. - -He looked as if he were dying, and Hank, to redress the effects of the -blow he had been forced to deal, sprang forward, and putting his arms -about Mr. Willett's shoulder, he said, though he had not the slightest -faith in his own words: - -"Thar ain't no doubt in my mind but the boys made a raft. Sam was sharp, -and thar was lots of timber to do it." - -"But that would only be going to death," said Mr. Willett faintly and -slowly. - -"Oh, not by a long odds. Thar's lots and lots of places lower down whar -they might get out easy. Now, let's jest have patience; thar ain't -nothin' like a good stock of patience. Why, it wouldn't s'prise me not a -bit if I was to see Sam and the hull caboodle of 'em walk into the door -of this dugout this blessed minute," and Hank fixed his eyes steadily on -the opening, as if he were quite prepared for this phenomenon. - -Leaving Hank Tims to fan the faint ray of hope he had kindled in the -afflicted father's heart, let us give a few minutes to reporting the -conduct of the two men who were the authors of all this trouble. - -There were some very bad men at Hurley's Gulch, as there are bad men in -any gathering the world over, but in justice it should be said that a -majority aimed to do as near right as they knew how. - -Men's ideas of right and wrong vary with their training and their -natural abilities to weigh evidence and comprehend truth. But even those -men who are rude in their bearing, or even vicious in their lives, have -their hearts touched by a death that brings great sorrow to some fond, -loving heart. - -So when the people at Hurley's Gulch began to think over Mr. Willett's -loss, they forgot for the time the grave offence with which he was -charged, and expressed themselves as very sorry for the death of his -boy. - -This change of feeling did not escape the ever wide-awake observation of -Frank Shirley. - -He was a pretty good judge of human nature, and so he thought it wiser -not to say anything at this time. Indeed, he played his part so well -that he expressed to the crowd, whom he kept attached to him by frequent -treating, that he was very sorry for young Sam Willett's loss. - -"He was a cousin of mine," sighed Shirley, "and not a bit like his -father." - -How could the people know that the death of Sam Willett was the one -object that brought Shirley to this land, and how could they know that -the life of the noble youth was the one thing that stood between this -fellow and a large fortune. - -"I tell you, Mr. Shirley," said Badger to his employer the day after the -reception of the news from Gold Cave Camp, "you're a keen one. Oh, you -ken play it fine--finer'n any one I ever seed." - -"Do you think so, Badger?" said Shirley, flattered by this compliment to -his talent for crime. - -"Yes, I do. In a day or two the boys'll forgit all about the death of -young Willett. Then you ken swing in on the murder of Tom Edwards again, -and make them do jest as you please." - -"Well, I'll try," replied the jubilant Shirley. - - - - -CHAPTER XVIII.--IN THE RAPIDS. - - -The bravest soldier, no matter how cool his bearing, feels a sense of -awe and dread when the rattle of rifles along the skirmish line tells -him that the murderous battle has begun. - -If there be men who never felt fear under such nerve-trying -circumstances, then they certainly deserve no credit, for true courage -consists in the determination to face a danger while fully comprehending -its awful possibilities. - -Sam Willett wisely decided not to picture to Ike and Wah Shin the -dangers that lay before them; but while doing this he did not attempt to -hide from himself the fact that within a few hours himself and his -faithful companions might be the dead playthings of the wild waters. - -As calmly and sternly as the cavalry leader wheels his battalions into -line in front of the murderous artillery which he intends to charge, Sam -Willett made his preparations for the passage of the rapids. - -He strengthened the raft and fastened to it their arms and blankets, and -then to prevent their being washed off, or lost if they fell overboard, -he insisted that each should tie a rope about his waist, the other end -being fastened to the logs. - -It was not until the last precautions against the danger that lay ahead -were proposed that Ike began to feel greatly alarmed. - -"Golly, Mistah Sam," he said, with trembling lips, "hitchin ob oursels -to dese yar logs wif ropes looks to me kinder skittish." - -"I hope they may not be needed," said Sam, as he made ready to push the -raft off. - -"You seed dem currents down de ribber?" - -"I did." - -"Pooty ugly, ain't dey?" - -"We must pass them." - -"'Twas dem as drownded Ulna?" - -"He fell from a rock into the river." - -"Den if he couldn't swim back, dem currents must be mighty bad." - -"No can stay hele; no can backee go; den wat we do; allee same we mustee -glong down ribbel," said Wah Shin, who seemed to have no trouble in -taking in the situation. - -"Wa'al," said Ike, desperately, "I reckon de job's got to be did. I -don't want to be drowned way down har, when no one won't neber heah ob -me agin, an' moah 'ticklah, Mistah Sam, I doesn't want you to die, but -if dat be de good Lor's will, den I says amen, an' goes ahead." - -Sam at first thought that he would tie Maj to the raft, but as the -animal had not the reason to avail himself of this advantage, he decided -to let him take his chances if he should be washed off. - -"Now, I am about to push off," said Sam, standing at the stern with the -pole in his hand, "and if we get into danger I want you both to keep -cool and do as I say. Don't yell out, or try to hang on to each other, -if the raft should go to pieces." - -Ike and Wah Shin promised to do as they were told, and then with a -mental prayer to Heaven to guide and protect him, Sam set one end of the -pole against the bank and pushed the raft into the current. - -"Dis don't seem so powahful bad," said Ike, as he looked ahead and saw a -smooth expanse extending for nearly a half mile in front. - -"Not so bad, Ike," said Sam, his eyes fixed on the bend, beyond which he -knew the dreaded rapids rolled. - -As they drifted on he could not help recalling the mighty falls of -Niagara which he had visited with his father a few years before. - -He remembered that a few miles above the falls the majestic river flowed -on grandly and swiftly, without a ripple to break its glassy surface, or -a murmur to suggest the frightful plunge it was soon to take. Then came -the roaring rapids and the thundering fall. - -What if these rapids ended in the same way? - -This thought had just flashed through his mind, when the raft shot past -the rock from which Ulna had fallen, and the next instant it swung round -the bend, and the thunder of the waters was heard and the seething white -waves came to view. - -Every stick of timber in the raft groaned, as if it were a sentient -being, trembling at its coming destruction. - -Ike and Wah Shin fell flat on the logs and clung to them with all their -might, not daring to look at the prospect ahead. - -Even Sam dropped on his knees and gazed steadily in front, while the dog -crept towards him, and, with a plaintive whine, thrust his nose into his -master's breast. - -Sam soon discovered that it would not only be useless, but absolutely -dangerous to attempt to steer the raft, so he hauled in the pole and -with his hands clung to the logs on either side. - -The speed at which they went down soon became so frightfully great that -the objects along the shore could not be distinguished, but became -streaked and confused to their sight. - -Now and again the raft would strike against one of the black rocks, that -rose like a monster out of the water, and then it would spin and whirl -down the torrent as if determined to throw off its occupants. - -Bend after bend was passed, and Sam began to think that the rapids -extended indefinitely, when to his horror the raft struck against -another rock, and with such force that the ropes, fastening one end, -snapped and broke like a silken thread in the hands of a giant. - -At the same instant the logs parted and spread out like a fan, throwing -all the occupants into the water. - -Now the wisdom of Sam's precaution in tying themselves to the raft -became evident. - -Had it not been for this they would have been swept apart and drowned at -once, but as it was the ropes not only kept them together, but enabled -them to haul themselves back to the logs and cling to them for support. - -The dog was, of course, thrown out with the others, and was at once -swept beyond reach, though for some minutes Sam could see the brave -creature facing the current and making a desperate effort to swim back. - -Sam was just beginning to feel that the raft must soon go to pieces, -when they were suddenly swept around a bend and into a calm expanse of -water, though a few hundred yards further on he saw the line of white -foam that indicated other rapids ahead. - -Calling to his companions to assist him, and putting forth a superhuman -effort himself, Sam succeeded in getting the raft out of the current and -into a little cove where there was shallow water and a ledge of smooth, -shelving rocks that made a good landing place. - -They straightened out the logs, made them fast again, and then they took -off the arms and frayed blankets that had not been swept from the raft -by the rocks and rapids. - -This done the three clambered up to a dry place, though they were so wet -that it would not have made any difference if they stood in the water. - -Thinking that Ulna might have made a landing at some point along the -shore of this calm expanse, Sam looked up and down both banks, but -excepting Ike, Wah Shin and himself there was not a living creature in -sight, even the dog had been unable to resist the force of the current. - -"Dis am a mighty bad fix, sure enuff," were Ike's first words as he -surveyed his dripping form and then began slowly to take in the -situation. - -"It might be worse," was Sam's comment, though if he had been called on -to explain how it well could be worse, he would have been at a loss to -tell. - -"Watel we do nex," asked Wah Shin, and he half-raised his hands and let -them fall again to indicate his utter helplessness. - -Sam could not reply. He would have felt a great sense of relief if -either of the others had made a reasonable suggestion. - -It was growing dark, and he knew that it would be madness to attempt the -river again till the light of another full day lay before them. - -In answer to Wah Shin's question, Ike said: - -"I'll tell yeh w'at I'd like to do, Wah." - -"I can tellee mesel lat too," said Wah Shin. - -"In de fust place I'd like some nice dry clothes." - -"I too," said Wah. - -"Den I wouldn't mind bein' in a nice house." - -"Ugh," and Wah shrugged himself as if he thought that a very lovely -idea. - -"Den," continued Ike, as he smacked his lips, "I'd like to be a settin' -down to a table in dat house." - -"Ha!" cried Wah. - -"An'--an' I'd like to hab dat table filled way up wid good tings, an' me -a settin' dar free to pile in all I wanted----" - -"Dat am belly nice," said Wah. - -"Den arter I'd eat, an' eat an' eat, till I couldn't more'n stan', I'd -have some one pick me up and tote me off to de wahmest, softest bed----" - -At this point Sam interrupted by saying: - -"We must all take off our clothes and wring them out, for I am not going -to try it again till morning." - - - - -CHAPTER XIX.--AFLOAT AGAIN. - - -Work is the one certain remedy for a troubled mind. Sam felt that if he -didn't do something he should go distracted, and judging by his own -feelings he reasoned that it would be better for Ike and Wah Shin if -their hands and brains were employed. - -He made them wring out their own clothes and the blankets, and spread -them on the rocks to dry; and then all three set to work to repair the -damage to the raft. - -They found that the ropes that held the logs together had been cut and -frayed by the keen edges of the rocks, with which they were brought into -contact. - -They took the whole raft to pieces; first having tied the rope till it -was as strong, though shorter, than it was before, and then they -refastened the whole structure, making it as secure as possible with the -material at hand. - -They had but just completed their work, and made the raft fast by -anchoring it to a stone, when it suddenly grew so dark that they could -hardly see each other. - -They next put on their clothes, which were far from being dry, and their -discomfort was increased by a keen, cold wind, that came driving down -the cañon. - -"Wat's to be did de nex'?" asked Ike, his teeth chattering and his voice -tremulous with the cold. - -"We must move about till our clothes get dry. It will never do to have -rheumatism added to our other troubles," said Sam. - -"Wa'al, I dunno dat we'd be much de wuss off, if we had rheumatiz, an' -measles, an' toothaches, an' dem tings. Fac' is, Mistah Sam, we couldn't -well be in a badder fix, no matter wat happened to us." - -"Oh, yes," drawled Wah Shin, "'spose we hab no clothes, no laftee, no -gun, no can gettee way, den wat?" - -"Keep moving, boys, till you get warm," called out Sam, and he set the -example by walking about on the flat top of the rock, taking care that -neither himself nor companions went too close to the perilous edge. - -The exertion and the heat of their bodies warmed them up and dried their -clothes, but by this time it was near midnight. - -There was no danger of being disturbed by savage foe or wild beast, -still Sam thought it better to keep up the system of guards he had first -established. - -He was so weary that he could have dropped on the hard, cold rock on -which he stood, and been asleep at once, but that fine sense of duty -that distinguished all his acts, led him to forget or put aside his own -wants for the safety and comfort of others. - -But though Ike loved to eat and sleep as well as any youth, black or -white, that ever lived, there was a "streek" of thoughtfulness and -unselfishness in his character that asserted itself now and then. - -When the order of the watch was arranged, Ike laid his hand on his young -master's shoulder and said: - -"See heah, Mistah Sam, does yeh tink I'm blind?" - -"Certainly not, Ike. Why should you ask such a question as that?" asked -Sam, in great surprise. - -"Coz, Ize got de reasons." - -"Well, what are they?" - -"Don't yeh tink I'ze been a watchin' ob yeh?" - -"What of it, Ike?" - -"Dar's dis ob it. I'ze seed yeh a workin' an' a workin', an' not gettin' -no rest nur sleep, but jest a layin' yersel' out foh to keer for us -no-account folks, and make us comf'able. Now, I know I'm mean 'bout -habin' my share ob grub an' sleepin', an' dem tings, but I ain't so -mean's not to see an' tink." - -"You are a good fellow, Ike, but I really can't see what you are driving -at," said Sam. - -"I'm dribein' at dis, dat you'z got to rest de fust one. Har, de -blankets ain't so awful wet, an' if you ain't wahm enough, yeh can hab -my coat. So do lie down an' take a sleep, dat'll make yeh brain more -clarer foh to tink to-morrow." - -When one is inclined to a thing, it does not require much urging. - -Sam yielded to Ike's entreaties, which were supported by Wah Shin, in -the strongest English he could command. - -They made him as comfortable as possible under the circumstances, and, -after promising to wake him when his turn came, they crept off some -distance, and sitting down side by side they talked in whispers like a -pair of conspirators. - -"Wah Shin?" - -"Glang, Ike, me gottee no deaf," said Wah. - -"You're a good feller." - -"Me tinkee so, too," said the modest Mongolian. - -"You like Mistah Sam?" - -"Oh, yes; likee him gleat heap." - -"I thought so." - -"Him belly fine youngee man." - -"Now, Wah, you an' me's had a heap sight more sleep dan Mistah Sam since -we started out on dis yar scrimmidge, ain't we?" - -"Oh, yes, heap molee." - -"So," continued Ike with the confidential whisper of one about to -communicate a great secret, "I wants you an' me to play a trick on him." - -"Playee tlick!" repeated Wah, puzzled as to the meaning. - -"Yes; yeh see he's sleepin' now like a angel." - -"Dunno; me nebel see angel. W'at him?" - -Without attempting to enlighten Wah as to the nature of angels, of which -it must be confessed he had only a vague conception himself, Ike said. - -"We must let him sleep right straight 'long till de mornin'; den w'en he -gits up an' rubs his eyes an' sees it's daylight, he'll be dat s'prised -ho won't know w'at to say. Won't dat be a trick?" - -"Him belly nice tlick," chuckled Wah. "Heap muchee fun. Let 'im sleep; -you, me watchee till sun him come top-side galore. Ike, you gottee heap -big head," and Wah patted the black boy's head in a way that showed -affection and approval. - -A generous master makes faithful servants. We do not know whether this -is an adage or not, but it sounds as if it ought to be. - -So weary was poor Sam that Ike and Wah Shin might have slept through the -night without his knowing it, but it did not require his watchful -presence to make them dutiful. - -They divided the night into two reliefs, each taking a half and doing -his duty with the fine sense of pleasure that came from the knowledge -that they were cheating Sam into a long and much needed rest. - -Sam certainly was much surprised when he got up in the morning and saw -the flush of day in the strip of sky far overhead and the light coming -into the depths of the cañon. - -He was certainly much refreshed by his rest, and when he saw Ike smiling -near by, he at once guessed what had been done. - -"Why didn't you wake me up?" he asked. - -Ike laughed and at once told him of "the trick" he and Wah Shin had -played. - -Sam was much touched by this evidence of thoughtfulness and devotion, -and he fastened it in his memory, that it might be easily recalled if -the chance ever came to show his appreciation in another form than -words. - -This was the first morning that they were wholly without food since -starting on their journey. - -All were decidedly hungry, but not a word was said about eating. Even -Ike, always ready to show he had an appetite, felt that it would be -somewhat personal to talk about "grub," but at heart he blamed himself -for having eat so much the day before. It would have been the part of -wisdom, he thought, to have put a little away for this morning. - -"Wa'al, Mistah Sam, wat's to be did nex'?" asked Ike, as he looked down -at the white line that marked the beginning of another series of unknown -rapids about three hundred yards away. - -"We must try it again, Ike," said Sam, bravely. - -"Down de ribber?" - -"Do you think we could go up?" - -"Wa'al, not berry well, an' if we could dis chile wouldn't be in foh -tryin' it again." - -"Then we must go down." - -"No cannee help oulsel's, if so we go flom dis," said Wah Shin, with all -the wisdom of Confucius. - -Once more the few remaining things were placed as securely as was -possible on the raft. - -Again, and without the wondering of the day before, Ike and Wah Shin -imitated Sam by tying themselves to the raft. - -With much of that feeling of desperation that stirs an officer who leads -his men in a hopeless assault against a powerful enemy, Sam pushed the -raft into the stream. - -The current near the shore was slow, but as they got out further it -became more rapid, until at length they shot down with the speed of a -race-horse for the white line of foam that flashed between the grim -walls like the teeth of some fierce monster set in lips of stone. - -"Cling tight to the raft, boys!" cried Sam, as the logs began to groan -and tremble. "Cling fast and keep cool! We are going through all right!" - -The brave fellow did not have much faith in his own words, but they had -an inspiriting effect on the others. - -Into the warring rapids shot the raft, and in an instant all were -drenched in the spray that dashed around them. - -Sam could not see ten feet ahead. - -His mind, like the waters and the raft, was in a wild whirl; yet, with -the grip of a drowning man, he clung to the logs and tried to shout -words of cheer to the others. - - - - -CHAPTER XX.--THE TRIAL BEGINS. - - -At the instigation of Collins and his partner, Si Brill, a number of men -started off from Hurley's Gulch to see if they could find Sam Willett -and his companions, or learn anything of their fate. - -Neither the searchers nor those who sent them had any great faith in -their mission, but the very fact that they tried shows that they were -moved by a feeling of commendable humanity. - -Three days passed and the men came back saying they could not find Sam -Willett, nor the others, and giving it as their opinion, that they had -all been drowned. - -In the meantime Frank Shirley, who had much of that cunning and -ingenuity for which men of his character are so often noted, sought to -create the impression that Sam was alive, but that he had run away, in -order not to be forced to appear against his father. - -The night the searchers came back there was a great crowd in the bar of -the principal saloon, and as Shirley was treating, as usual, he was the -center of attraction and virtually the chairman of the gathering. - -A few of the men had just expressed sorrow for Sam's death, when Shirley -said: - -"I'd be sorrier than any one if I knew the young fellow was dead, but -I'm happy to say I don't believe he is." - -"Of course, you've got reasons for your belief," said one. - -"Yes; I always have good reasons for everything I do and say," said -Shirley, feeling the authority his free use of money had given him. - -"Mebbe you'd tell us why you think so," said the man. - -"I'll explain by asking you some questions," said Shirley, licking his -lips, as he always did while speaking. - -"Fire ahead," said the man. - -"You remember that Indian boy--what's his name?" - -"Ulna," suggested the man. - -"Yes, Ulna. Well, the day of the arrest of these two men, Willett and -Tims, for the cruel murder of poor Tom Edwards, this Indian boy was sent -to Gold Cave Camp to bring back the son of one of the prisoners and a -certain paper. Isn't that so?" and Shirley looked around for the -approval of the assembly. - -"Yes, that's so!" shouted a number. - -"Now," continued Frank Shirley, with the deliberation of a man who had -carefully weighed what he was about to say, "I ask you gentlemen if this -Ulna returned to Hurley's Gulch?" - -"No!" exclaimed half the men in the place. - -"Of course he didn't. Now, what should we, as sensible men, infer from -this fact?" - -Again Shirley looked about the room, and as no one attempted to say what -should be inferred from the fact as stated, he proceeded to enlighten -them. - -"As Ulna did not come back and cannot be found, it is safe to infer that -he succeeded in delivering his message to Mr. Willett's son." - -"Yes," said the man who had drawn Shirley out, "I must say it looks very -much that way." - -"Very well; Mr. Willett's son, who is a wonderfully brave, bright young -fellow, got that message, and from this fact I make another inference." - -Shirley licked his lips and remained silent so long that it was becoming -painful, and Badger voiced the feeling of the crowd by calling out: - -"Go ahead and give us yer p'ints!" - -"If Ulna could get to Gold Cave Camp in the night with that message, -don't you think that young Sam Willett could get away?" - -Nearly every one said this looked reasonable. - -"Now, my belief," Shirley went on, "is that he and all hands did get -away. The searchers, who have just come from the camp, say the place was -cleaned out, rifles and all that being gone, which wouldn't be the case -if the folks were drowned." - -"But," said the man who had started this discussion, "if the young -feller got away, why didn't he come right straight to Hurley's Gulch?" - -"Ah, that's the vital question," said Shirley, with a more vigorous lick -at his lips. "Now, you'd like to know why I think he didn't come here?" - -"I certainly should," said the man. - -"It was because he had no paper to bring. Oh, he's a bright fellow; he's -a second cousin of mine, and I can put myself in his place and just see -how he reasoned about this matter." - -"Don't wait, but go right in and tell us all about it," said the -impatient Badger, whose admiration for his employer was rising every -moment. - -"Why, he reasoned that if he came here without Tom Edwards' -receipt--which he knew had no existence--that the gentlemen of the -vigilance committee would make short work of his father----" - -"And he was as right as right can be in that guess," interrupted Badger. - -"But," continued Shirley, "being a keen young fellow, he made up his -mind that nothing would be done to his father if he stayed away. He -believed the vigilantes would wait for several days, as they've already -done, and that by the end of that time their anger would go down; they -would look more lightly on the murder of poor Tom Edwards--and that -would be the last of it. But talking is mighty dry work; step up to the -bar, boys, and have a drink with me." - -Like other invitations of the same kind, from the same source, this one -was promptly accepted, the effect being to convince nearly every man -that there was no getting away from Frank Shirley's reasoning. - -Before the meeting broke up that night, which it did not do till a late -hour, it was firmly decided that the trial of Mr. Willett and Hank Tims -should take place the next day, which being Sunday would enable every -one at Hurley's Gulch to be present. - -In addition to its effect on the unfortunate men, the foregoing -conversation serves admirably to show how a cunning and malicious man -can pervert facts to suit himself, and while making them seem most like -truth to the reason, have them exactly opposite to it in fact. - -Unobserved by the crowd in the bar, Collins had overheard this -conversation, and the conclusion to which a majority of the vigilantes -had come. - -Being simple-hearted, Collins was imposed on for the time being by -Shirley's argument, and while he was listening to it he really believed -that it might be true; but as he slowly returned to the dugout, his good -sense asserted itself and he saw the utter falsity of the fellow's -reasoning. - -Knowing how deeply troubled Mr. Willett was by the uncertain fate of his -beloved son, Collins said nothing to him about the decision of the -vigilantes till the following morning. - -After breakfast Collins repeated the talk at the saloon the night -before, and added: - -"I hope the feller's right 'bout the boy's safety." - -"Ah, I wish he were," sighed Mr. Willett. "But if my dear boy were -living, and he could get to me, sleep would not touch his eyes till he -was again at my side." - -"Thar's one thing in partiklar I'd like to git out of this scrape for," -said Hank, and on being asked by Brill what that thing was, he -continued: - -"I'd like to lick that lyin' slanderin' cowardly Shirley. Only to think -of a critter like him accusin' young Sam Willett of doin' a low, mean -trick. Ah, he's a dirty dog, if one ever came west of the Sierra -Madres." - -Up to this time Mr. Willett had not explained to Collins and Si Brill, -Shirley's reasons for desiring to see his son dead and himself out of -the way. He did so now. - -"Wa'al!" exclaimed Brill, "that thar explanation shows the culled pusson -in the wood-pile, as clar as daylight. Ah, I only wish Bob Sturgis--he -was a lawyer--didn't leave camp when he did; but I'll see that you have -a show to defend yourself, if we've got to fight for it?" - -While the sturdy miner was speaking, two rough looking men--they were -the worst element in the vigilance committee--appeared in the doorway -and one of them called out: - -"We've come from the kimitty, and we'er agoin' to fotch up the prizners; -so trot 'em out." - -"We'll trot 'em out," replied Collins, as he took down his rifle from a -peg, "and we'll trot along with 'em, for neither Si Brill nor me has -give up our office as guards yet, an' what's more, we ain't agoin' to do -it till this case is ended, one way or the other." - -"We ain't got no objection," growled one of the men, "only don't keep us -waitin' har all day." - -"If yer in a great hurry," retorted Brill, as he also reached for his -rifle, "go back as you come, for we've got charge of the prizners, and -you can't take 'em from us without a fight." - -The two men stepped back to consult, and Collins whispered, as he handed -Mr. Willett and Hank two revolvers each: - -"Hide those about your clothes, you may find them handy before we get -through with this scrape." - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims quickly secreted the revolvers in their inside -breast pockets and then followed the guards out of the dugout. - -They clambered up the bank, ignoring the two men who constituted the -"kimitty" and went on to the hotel, the dining-room of which--it was -also the kitchen--was set apart by the proprietor for the trial. - -The place was already crowded to suffocation, and a curious feature of -the gathering was the fact that the burly, bearded man, who was to act -as judge, and every other man in the room, was armed to the teeth and -looked as if eager for a fight. - - - - -CHAPTER XXI.--A BREAK IN THE CLOUDS. - - -The second series of rapids, though much more dreaded by Sam than the -first, proved to be neither very long, nor, by comparison, very -dangerous. - -Within ten minutes from the time of entering them they were passed in -safety, and the raft was floating down the broadest, smoothest current -they had experienced since starting on their perilous journey. - -Ike and Wah Shin cautiously released their hold on the logs and looked -about them. - -Sam again stood up with the steering pole in his hands. - -Straight as an arrow, and for fully three miles, the river could be seen -flowing down between its towering banks. - -This sight brought to Sam a sense of great relief, and its effect on Ike -was decidedly exhilarating. - -Standing up in the front of the raft he waved his arms like a windmill -and shouted out: - -"Bress de Lor! we'z safe! we'z safe!" - -Escape from the awful dangers they had just come through so miraculously -made Ike forget, for the moment, his hunger and the fact that there -could be no safety to people floating on a shaky raft, down a river -whose course seemed through the very heart of sterile, towering -mountains. - -Ah, well, this only goes to show that, no matter how desperate the -situation we always have something to be thankful for; and that no -matter how bad things are, so long as life, health and hope remain, they -might be worse. - -Another thing very unusual in this experience was the fact that the -cañon walls, instead of rising straight up from the water, stood back, -leaving on either side a strip on which, amid great masses of detached -sandstone there grew a number of stunted mezquite and cedar trees. - -They were all as wet as they well could be, but they had grown so -accustomed to this that Sam made up his mind not to go ashore to dry -their clothes, but to keep right on, when a shout from Ike caused him to -change his purpose. - -"I see a wolf or a deer; way dar to de right!" and Ike pointed down to -where the bushes hid the rocks. - -"Lat no deel," said Wah Shin, as he bent forward and shaded his eyes. - -"Mebbe yeh ken tell us wat it is," said Ike, with a touch of sarcasm, -for having discovered the animal he felt that he had a right to say what -it was. - -"Lat's yalla doggee," said Wah Shin. - -And Wah Shin was right, for at that instant the animal sprang into view -and began a vigorous barking, and a frisking back and forth. - -"It's Maj! It's Maj!" cried Ike. - -Maj it certainly was, and the joy of the faithful creature at seeing his -friends was touching. - -Sam at once guided the raft to the shore, but while it was yet many -yards away, the dog swam out, was pulled on board and at once jumped on -Sam, who if he had not been wet before certainly would have been now. - -"Dat ar dog looks to me ez if he had been habin' a big feed some place," -said Ike, when they got on shore, and he could examine Maj's rounded -form, which his dripping coat made more conspicuous. - -"Mebbe him full of watel," suggested Wah Shin. - -"No," said Ike, as he pressed the dog's sides, "it's grub; good solid -grub." Then, addressing Maj, he said, in tones intended to be very -seductive: "See har, ole feller, don't go foh to tell me dat yer hungry, -like we is. You'se been eatin' meat, don't say 'no' foh I won't stan' -it; but, like a good dorg, show me de place whar yeh found it, an' if -ebber I gits out ob dis yeh fix, I'll buy yeh a brass collar, wif yeh -name on de outside in great big letters." - -As if he understood this and was anxious to earn the reward so -generously offered him, Maj started off with a short, sharp bark, but -before he had gone very far he turned and came slowly back again, as if -he had changed his mind. - -Meanwhile, Wah Shin got together a pile of dry wood, and, as the matches -in Sam's water-proof case escaped the water, they soon had a roaring -fire, before which their cargo and their clothes--the latter well -tattered--were placed to dry. - -At first Sam, who was now very hungry, was inclined to think that it was -a whim of Ike's that led him to see anything suggestive of food in the -dog's appearance, but when he came to look carefully at the animal and -study his contented manner, he was satisfied that he had found something -to eat since being washed from the raft. - -With nearly all his clothes drying before the fire, Sam, followed by -Ike, started off to examine the shore further down. - -He had not gone far when he noticed great clefts in the walls of the -cañon, as if the mighty mass had been cracked by some tremendous power. - -These fissures ran up and back for thousands of feet, but the largest -one visible was not of sufficient width to admit of their getting up in -that way, neither were these openings on the side of the cañon which -they must ascend in order to reach Hurley's Gulch. - -An examination of the point where one of the fissures came down to the -shore convinced Sam that some creatures had used this passage-way -recently as an avenue for ascending to the upper world, or coming down -to this profound and silent valley. - -He had just communicated this opinion to Ike, and was about to turn away -when his attention was attracted to the dog, now standing with his right -paw raised, his tail extended and his whole form as rigid as if it had -been cut in marble. - -"See!" shouted Ike, "Maj is on de p'int! Whar, whar's de game?" - -The words had scarcely passed his lips when there was a squeak and a -rushing noise, and a score, or more, long-eared rabbits dashed by within -twenty feet of the party. - -"Hooraw! Rabbits! rabbits!" cried Ike. "Let us git our guns! Rabbits -makes bully grub!" - -Sam had not his gun with him, but he at once started back to the fire -and examined his rifle, which had come through without being damaged. - -The water had not affected the metallic cartridges, of which he had a -good supply left. Filling his belt with these he started off, Ike -keeping by his side with his remarkable old shot-gun on his shoulder, -though its utter uselessness had been emphasized by its recent heavy -rusting. - -Ike was useful, however, in holding back the dog, who had evidently been -feeding on rabbit since his landing at this place. - -Sam was an excellent rifleman, having had much practice, and being -possessed of nerves as true and steady as steel, without which the -weapon can never be mastered. - -He crept ahead, and about three hundred yards below the camp he came -within sight of a little cove, or pocket, in the cañon wall that seemed -literally to swarm with long-eared rabbits. - -He fired with judgment, and kept firing while the creatures remained in -sight and he was sure of his shots. - -The result was that within five minutes he had killed thirteen rabbits. - -Everyone that was struck was taken, and to the true hunter, who never -inflicts an unnecessary wound on the animals he hunts, this is always a -great satisfaction. - -Ike was disappointed that he had not been permitted to try "her," as he -called his old shot-gun, on the game; but, as he picked up the goodly -load of rabbits and carried it back to camp, it would be difficult to -imagine a more delighted fellow. - -It is said that "it never rains but it pours," and this seemed to be the -case with the sudden turn in the tide of good luck that had set in -toward our unfortunate friends. - -When they got back to camp, they found that Wah Shin had been testing -the fish lines and flies, which they had scarcely thought of up to this -time, and with such unexpectedly good luck that he had landed two fine -trout and was in the act of pulling in the third when Ike came to sight -laden down with game. - -The least ray of light is cheering to those who have been long in -darkness; and the briefest cessation from pain is like Heaven to those -groaning in agony! so the prospect of food--a prospect made all the more -delightful by the gnawing hunger each felt so keenly--made them forget -for the time all the trials they had passed and the uncertain future -that lay before them. - -Even the fire blazed up cheerily as if in sympathy with their feelings, -and Maj lay down like a faithful scout, who has guided the famished into -a land--of rabbits. - -In almost as short a time as it takes to tell it, the rabbits and the -fish were cooking. - -We shall not attempt to describe that feast, for there are some things -impossible to even our expressive English tongue. - -Suffice it to say, each ate all he could, with a result that "made away" -with one half the supply on hand. - -They had just finished their most enjoyable meal, when Wah Shin, who -chanced to be looking toward the river, uttered a cry of alarm. - -The others quickly turned in that direction, and, to their amazement, -they saw the spectral figure of a dark man rising from the water. - - - - -CHAPTER XXII.--"JOY! JOY! IT IS ULNA AGAIN!" - - -Unlike Ike and Wah Shin, Sam Willett was not the least superstitious, -yet, as he saw the spectral figure rising from the shore he could not -imagine it a human being. - -"Did you think me dead?" asked the dripping figure. - -By this time Sam had leaped to his feet and advanced toward their -extraordinary visitor. - -He was not long in doubt. - -There was no mistaking the lithe figure and the now pinched but still -expressive face. - -"Joy! joy! It is Ulna again!" cried Sam, and with a bound he was on the -shore and the young Ute was in his arms. - -As soon as Ike and Wah Shin were convinced that this was Ulna in the -flesh and not his ghost, they ran down and performed such a war dance -about him, as they held his hands, as he never witnessed around the camp -fires of his own tribe. - -When Ike could give expression to his delight, he pulled Ulna in the -direction of the fire, calling out the while: - -"Tum along; tum along! you looks if yeh hadn't had nawthin' to eat foh -years. We kin fix yeh. We kin stuff yeh with rabbits till yeh can't -stan'; an' w'en dem's gone we knows de place whar we kin go an' git lots -moah." - -Ulna certainly did look famished, but true to himself, neither by word -nor sign did he give expression to the sufferings he had passed through -nor the agony of hunger he was now enduring. - -The half of a cooked rabbit was left from the recent banquet, and Ulna -had this placed in his hand and made to sit on a stone before the fire. - -"Eat 'em allee up; me gettee nodle one, no time," said Wah Shin, who was -never so happy as when he was cooking. - -"Yes," urged Ike, "wade right in. Dar ain't no stint dis time. We've -found de head-quahtahs ob all de rabbits, an' we ain't a gwine foh to be -hungry no moah." - -After all these expressions of hospitality and good will, Sam had a -chance to say, as he took a seat beside Ulna. - -"I thought I had seen you for the last time, but thank God you and all -of us are saved to meet again." - -"When I called 'farewell' to you," said Ulna, "I felt the end had come, -but like the people of my tribe I did not give up----" - -"Nevah give up de ship," interjected Ike. - -"I made up my mind to resist the flood till my strength was gone," -continued Ulna. - -"One ain't got much strent, onless he's got plenty to eat an' lots ob -time to sleep," said Ike, who, though much interested in Ulna, felt that -he must give expression to his own feelings or choke. - -The young Indian explained that he was so weighted down by his rifle and -cartridges that, after the first rapids had been passed, he had only -strength left to keep afloat without being able to make the shore. - -"When I was swept into the second rapids," he said, "all hope vanished. -I must have been rendered unconscious by some blow, but be that as it -may, I have no memory of reaching the bank. When I came to last night I -was half lying in the water. I drew myself out and walked about, trying -to find something to eat. I could not sleep for thinking of you, for I -did not see, after what I had suffered, how you were to get through the -rapids on the raft." - -"I cannot describe to you how my heart beat with joy a few hours ago, -when I saw the raft shooting out of the foam with all its passengers -except the dog on board. I saw you making for the shore, and I shouted -to attract your attention to the opposite side." - -"If we'd a heerd yeh, yeh wouldn't ha' had to hollered twice," said Ike. - -"I did not feel very strong till I saw you, and then, as there was -nothing else left me, I made up my mind to try swimming across." - -"An' you made it; you made it like a--like a mice, an' yeh fotched yeh -rifle widge yeh," said Ike, in tones of great approval. - -"Ike he heap talkee," said Wah Shin, as he sat another half of a broiled -rabbit before Ulna. "Me cookee light slate along." - -"And now," said Ulna, who had the rare faculty of eating while he spoke, -"tell me how you made out after we parted in that strange way." - -Sam narrated the adventures, already recorded, and after some -discussion, to Ike's great delight, it was decided to remain here for at -least another day, and to lay in a supply of rabbits before they faced -the unknown and dreaded cañon again. - -After Ulna had appeased his hunger, Sam made him lie down before the -fire and take a sleep, while he and Ike went off on another hunting -expedition. - -They brought home several loads of rabbits during the day, and Wah Shin, -who believed the game would keep better if it were cooked, busied -himself broiling rabbits till the last one was in an edible condition. - -Toward evening Ulna got up from the blanket, in which he had been -wrapped, and when he put on his clothes he looked like an entirely -different being from the spectre that appeared at the river side some -hours before. - -Now that the immediate danger from hunger was over, Sam would have been -comparatively happy had it not been for thoughts of his father. - -It is well that it is not given to us to lift the veil of the future, or -to tell what is happening beyond the range of our own vision. Yet, it -must be confessed, that it would have eased the minds of the loving -father and the devoted son, if each could have known of the situation of -the other at this time. - -It was not in Ike's nature to feel trouble for any length of time. He -had all the light-heartedness of his race, and an enviable capacity for -enjoying the present. - -He played with the dog; he laughed and sang, till at length, overcome -with the excess of enjoyment--and it may be the great quantities of -broiled rabbit he had eaten, he threw himself on the ground before the -fire and was asleep in no time. - -Again Sam detailed the guards, taking the first watch himself, and when -another morning dawned they found themselves more rested and refreshed -than they had been at any time since leaving Gold Cave Camp. - -The night before Ulna busied himself cutting the jack-rabbits' skins -into strips, which he knotted and twisted into ropes, and these ropes -were found of the greatest use in binding the pieces of the raft -together before they resumed their journey down the long, dark, watery -arcade. - -They were afloat again soon after daylight, and the thought that they -were safe and sound and all together again brought unspeakable joy to -every heart--and we might include Maj in the list, for from his seat in -the middle of the raft he eyed his friends with an expression of great -comfort and satisfaction. - -Long before the sun rose high enough to look into the cañon they had -drifted many miles away from their camp of the morning. - -The current, which Sam estimated at about three miles an hour, was -unbroken; flowing on in silent majesty, between the cold, gray cliffs -that rose at points for more than a mile sheer up, till their eyes grew -giddy in measuring their elevation. - -Here and there, to the right and left, they passed side cañons, black -and forbidding, like cells set in the walls of a mighty prison. - -In the afternoon these side cañons became more frequent, and as they -approached one Sam saw that a stream of clear water was pouring out from -between its walls. - -As this opening was on the east, or left bank, and in the direction of -Hurley's Gulch, he determined to try and get the raft into it, and see -if they could find an avenue to the upper world through its bed. - -He told Ulna of his purpose, and in an instant the young Ute had a pole -in his hand. - -They could touch bottom at this point and as the current from the side -cañon was not very strong, they succeeded in getting the raft in. - -The bed of the stream was so narrow in places that Ike on one side and -Wah Shin on the other were enabled to help along by pulling at the -rocks. - -It was growing dark again, and Sam, elated at their success so far, -began to fear that they might not be able to reach a place where they -could make fast for the night, when all at once the cañon walls, as if -they had been touched by the wand of a magician, expanded into a -beautiful bowl-shaped valley. - -This valley, in the dim light, looked to be fully a quarter of a mile in -diameter, and to the great surprise of all it had grassy banks; and as -their feet touched the sward the delicious odor of wild thyme and Indian -pinks filled the air. - -They found enough dry wood to make a fire to warm up their meat. - -"It looks to me," said Sam, as he sat quietly before the fire, for some -time after supper, "as if the worst is over, and that we can get to -Hurley's Gulch without much trouble from here." - - - - -CHAPTER XXIII.--THE TRIAL IN PROGRESS. - - -It cannot be denied that these rude forms of justice, known as "Judge -Lynch's Courts," have done some good in disorganized conditions of -society, by deterring, if not in punishing, crime. Indeed, in many cases -vigilance committees have been of the greatest service, even in places -where the law is supposed to be in force. At one time these committees -saved the city of San Francisco from the control of murderers and -gamblers. - -But on the whole they do more harm than good, for, as in the present -instance at Hurley's Gulch, bad men join them for self-protection or to -carry out their own selfish ends. - -The only men who can properly administer justice are those accustomed to -weighing evidence, and, no matter how well meaning, rough miners are apt -to be influenced by their feelings rather than their reason. - -It would not have taken a stranger long to see that a majority of the -men gathered in that canvas-covered apartment, in the hotel at Hurley's -Gulch, were prejudiced against the prisoners. - -To Mr. Willett, who was familiar with the dignified forms of courts of -justice in the East, the proceedings looked like a burlesque on law, for -an attempt was made to do things after the manner of long established -methods. - -Before the prisoners were brought in, it was decided by the committee -having the matter in charge, that a man named Jacks, an ignorant, -red-faced fellow, who had occupied a similar position on a former -occasion, should act as judge. - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims were given camp-chairs directly in front of -"the judge," who was making a desperate effort to maintain the dignified -bearing supposed to be essential to the office. - -The judge rapped with the bottom of a heavy tumbler--the contents of -which he had just drank--on a little pine table by his side and called -out: - -"The next thing in order, gents, is to 'lect a sheriff and a clerk, for -I propose that everything in this court shall be square and reg'lar; -and, if the prizners has any objections to the officers they must say so -now, or forever after hold their peace." - -When the judge had ceased speaking, a man with a bullet-head, a red -shirt and no neck to speak of--he was the proprietor of this remarkable -hotel--pushed himself through the crowd and called out: - -"I nominate Badger for sheriff of this here court." - -Without waiting for this motion to be seconded, the judge yelled out: - -"All in favor of Badger for sheriff say 'aye,' all opposed say 'aye,' -too." - -As this arrangement left no chance for those who might be opposed to -Badger to say "no," he was declared to be unanimously elected. - -"Next thing in order is to 'lect a clerk," said the judge. - -The man who had nominated Badger now yelled out: - -"I name Frank Shirley for clerk!" - -The judge, without waiting for the forms in such cases, would have -declared Shirley elected had not Mr. Willett leaped to his feet and -shouted: - -"I protest." - -"One of the prizners protests," said the judge, and he picked up the -tumbler with an angry gesture, as if about to hurl it at Mr. Willett's -head. - -Frank Shirley evidently expected to act as clerk of the court without -any opposition, for as soon as his name was called he pushed himself to -the front. - -"What objection have you got to Mr. Shirley, I'd like to know?" said the -judge, his face growing redder with anger. - -"I have many objections," said Mr. Willett, not at all intimidated by -the frowns of Shirley's friends. - -"Can't the man write?" asked the judge. - -"I suppose he can," replied Mr. Willett. - -"Wa'al, if he can write what more do you want in a clerk?" said the -judge. - -"Many things." - -"What are they?" - -"He should be free from prejudices." - -"And so he is." - -"And so he is not," said Mr. Willett, calmly but firmly. "He is my -bitter enemy. He has been setting the good men of this place against me -by his slanders and unblushing falsehoods. If you want this trial to be -fair you must not begin by making officers of men who may find it to -their interest to convict me." - -"I mean to do what's fair," Shirley managed to say. "And I am not -seeking this place. If you elect me I will serve, and do my whole duty -like a man, forgetting the past bad character of this unfortunate man, -Willett, who married my cousin and sent the poor woman to the grave by -his cruelties." - -This speech had a powerful effect on the mob, for the men began to -stamp, and some of them yelled: - -"Don't pay no heed to the prizner, but go right straight on with the -trial!" - -"Yes, we'll go on with the trial," said the judge, rapping for order, as -if determined to have it or break the table. - -Still cool and undaunted, Mr. Willett stood up till the storm had -somewhat abated. - -"If," he said, "I am to have no voice in my own defence, then this trial -is a farce and the sooner it ends in the murder of two innocent men the -better. If the judge did not mean that I could object to the officers -you were about to elect, why did he say so? I am simply availing myself -of the privilege you grant me, and I can give you still stronger reasons -for my opposition to this Frank Shirley, whom I here denounce, as a man -without manly courage or honest principle, and wholly unworthy of -belief. He is the one man in this territory who will reap wealth from -the death of myself and my son; are you willing to let such a man take -part in a trial that may seal my doom in his interest?" - -The judge was about to make an angry comment on this, but he was -prevented by Collins, who pushed his way through the crowd, and said -with a flash of the eyes that boded no good to those who opposed him: - -"Thar ain't no man in Hurley's Gulch, or out of it either that'll stand -before my face, or the face of my pard, Si Brill, and say that either of -us don't always tell the right up and down truth. If thar is sich a man -har, I'd like him to trot himself out so that I ken git a good square -look at him for 'bout three seconds and a half." - -As Collins said this, he quickly threw his strong right hand back on the -stock of one of his revolvers and took a calm survey of the sea of -astonished faces. - -If there was any man present who had doubts as to the honesty and -veracity of Mr. Collins and his partner, he thought it the part of -prudence to keep them to himself, for the present at least. - -"Now," continued Collins, after a half minute of painful silence, "I -happen to know, and so does my pard, Si Brill, that that sneak, Shirley, -who has been tryin' to make friends with the honest men and the mean -ones too, in this camp, by keepin' of 'em howlin' drunk, will fall into -a big estate over thar in Michigan, if Mr. Willett's son should chance -to peg out afore he gits to be old enough to vote in politics. So, for -one, I ain't a goin' to stand by and let that cur have anythin' to do -with the case. And more than that, you fellers ought to feel ashamed, -clar down to your boots, at 'lectin' for sheriff of this court a man -who's known in every minin' camp this side of the Sierras as a drunkard, -a bummer--yes, and a murderer! that's Badger, and I make the charge -right here to his face. If he don't deny it, mebbe some of his new found -friends, Jacks, the judge of the court for instance, might like to take -it up. If so, I'm just about as ready to back my words now as at any -other time." - -Again Collins drew himself up and looked about him, with his right hand -gripping the stock of his six-shooter. - -"See har, Collins," said the judge, speaking in tones intended to be -very soothing, "we're not here to fight, but to do our duty as good -men----" - -"But is it doin' yer duty to tell the prizners they kin object, and -then, when one of 'em does so, to try and choke him off, so's to put in -an enemy and a sneak as the clerk of this court?" - -"Wa'll, Collins, thar's other folks that ken write in this camp," said -the judge. "So I'll withdraw Mr. Shirley, and let another be named." - -Much crest-fallen at this decision of the judge, and the very -uncomplimentary opinion of himself which he had been forced to listen -to, Frank Shirley shrunk back into the crowd from which he had lately -emerged with so much confidence. - -Even Badger, usually so ready to assert himself, remained dumb in the -presence of this strong, brave man. - -A young miner, bearing the appropriate name of Clark, was selected as -clerk of the court, and then the judge said it was in order to swear in -a jury. - -"'Cordin' to law," he added, "the prizners has a right to ax the jury -questions, and to object to 'em if they doesn't pan out all right. But I -hope we'll git along faster'n we've been doin' else this yar trial will -last from July to eternity." - -As Mr. Willett did not know any of the men who were called to act as -jurors, he judged their fitness for the position by their appearance, -and so he offered objections to only two, and they were drunk. - -It was already noon when the judge declared that all the preliminaries -were over, and that he was now prepared to go on with the trial in -earnest, "and have justice did to the livin' and the dead." - - - - -CHAPTER XXIV.--OUT OF THE DEPTHS. - - -The delight of Sam Willett and his friends at being out of the great -cañon compensated them in part for the severe trials through which they -had recently passed, and with the disappearance of the stupendous walls -of the Colorado they believed all their troubles would vanish. - -Daylight convinced them that they had encamped for the night in a spot -that seemed like an Eden when compared with their recent resting-places, -though back from the charming little valley the rocks rose straight up -to a height nearly as great as those of the main river. - -Hungry people care more for the quantity than the variety of their food, -and so the boys made a hearty breakfast of the goodly supply of broiled -rabbits, and then started to find a way out of the valley. - -Sam and Ulna soon discovered that though they could not take the raft -much further up the side cañon, that they could march along its bed at -the bottom of which flowed a little stream of clear, cool water. - -They came back to camp, made up their arms, blankets and remaining -supplies into four bundles, and Sam announced that they would follow up -the stream on foot, for its direction was directly toward Hurley's -Gulch. - -With wise precaution Sam made fast the raft, for though such an event -was to be dreaded, he wanted to have it within reach if they were again -forced to go back to the cañon in which they had suffered so much. - -"Golly!" exclaimed Ike, as they took up their line of march along the -stream, "dis seems like ole times." - -"How so?" asked Sam, who was always pleased to see the colored boy in a -good humor. - -"W'y, we're totin' oursels instead of habin' de raft tote us. I 'clar to -goodness, I nebber wants to see a raft agin the longest day I lib. Ize -done wif rafts foreber and eber, amen." - -"Duno," said Wah Shin, who seemed always very solemn, "dat laft sabe us, -me no go backe on laft. No laft, den we allee dead." - -Maj barked approval of this and began to leap on every one in turn to -show his delight at the new method of travel. - -They found no serious obstacles in the cañon, though the sharp grade -rose in a way that indicated they were rising rapidly to the table lands -above. - -Late in the afternoon they came to a spring near the head of the ravine -along which they had been marching all day, and, as it was well known to -all that water and fuel were scarce in the uplands, it was decided to -stay here for the night. - -While Ike and Wah Shin gathered dry cactus and weeds to make a fire, -Ulna shouted to them not to make a light till he came back; then -motioning to Sam to follow him he led the way up a steep ascent, the -summit of which promised a view of the surrounding country. - -After a half hour's clambering they reached the top, and after the -cramped range of vision that recently hemmed them in, the sight that now -gladdened their eyes was thrilling and inspiring beyond expression. - -A table land, nearly devoid of vegetation, broken here and there by -chasms, or stately pillars of sand rock came to view under a blaze of -golden sun-light that poured down from a cloudless sky with a splendor -nearly blinding in its brilliancy. - -Away to the east the wall of the Sierra Madre mountains rose up like an -amethystine rampart, the snow peaks glowing in the light of the -declining sun like mighty masses of fire opal. - -After inhaling a long breath, the better to give expression to his -surprise and delight, Sam exclaimed in the poetical language of Mrs. -Hemans: - -"For the strength of the hills we bless Thee, my God, our father's God!" - -Ulna's fine face, though usually calm and impassive, now showed much -feeling, but that this was not due to the glorious scenery about them -was soon evident. - -"Sam," he said, "I didn't care to speak to you before Ike and Wah Shin, -for I did not want to excite them, but I saw something down there at the -spring that troubles me very much." - -"What was that?" asked Sam. - -"A track." - -"What kind of a track?" - -"An Indian's." - -"But this is the hunting ground of your people, the Utes, why should we -fear?" - -"There would be no war if the different tribes of men were content to -stay in their own hunting grounds, but that track was made by an -Apache," said Ulna, with more than usual seriousness. - -"How do you know it was made by an Apache?" - -"By the impression of the sole of the moccasin. The Mezcarillas have the -sole in two pieces, sewed together down the middle; the Utes have -their's in one." - -"But the Apaches have recently made a treaty of peace with the whites; -why should we fear them?" said Sam. - -"The Apaches will break the treaty, or will defy it, if they can do so -with safety. But they have never made a treaty with the Utes. For -generations they have been at war with my people, and if they knew I was -here they would be after my scalp with the hunger of wolves." - -"They could not take yours unless they took mine," said Sam, reaching -out his hand to prove his sincerity. - -"I am certain of that, Sam; but I do not want to add to your dangers and -troubles, if I cannot lessen them." - -"Of course not, Ulna, but I do not understand you." - -"It may be that the Apaches, and I am not sure they are about, will let -you and the others go on without harm, while if they discover me they -will be sure to make an attack on all of us," said Ulna, speaking very -slowly, but with a strong, steady voice. - -"Well, we can't help that. If they attack us we shall be able to show -that we have rifles and know how to handle them," said Sam, bravely. - -"This is what I have been thinking," continued Ulna. "I can make my way -alone from here faster than the four of us can, and I can elude the -Apaches as the hawk eludes the wild-cat. If I can reach Hurley's Gulch I -can start men out to your relief; if I fail you will be none the worse -off." - -"This is too serious a matter to decide at once," said Sam. "Even to -save the lives of the others, I would not increase your danger----" - -"But what if the danger of all is increased by my staying here?" - -"Then I should say go, but let us go down to the spring and think it all -over. I am sure we can tell Ike and Wah Shin about this; they are both -plucky and faithful." - -"As you say," was Ulna's reply, and he cast a quick glance about the -horizon before descending from the rock on which they had been standing. - -"What do you see?" asked Sam, looking eagerly in the direction of Ulna's -fixed eyes. - -"Apaches!" was the whispered reply. - -"Where?" - -"Off to the south." - -Looking in the direction pointed out by Ulna, Sam saw, low down on the -edge of the horizon, a number of pigmy figures that but for their -movements might have passed for bunches of cactus. - -"Are they coming this way?" asked Sam, unconsciously tightening his grip -on his rifle, while his heart beat faster. - -"I cannot tell that, but if they should come they must not find us -here." - -Ulna sprang down the rocks, followed by Sam, and they found Ike and Wah -Shin about to start a fire. - -"You must make no fire to-night," said Sam. - -"What foh?" asked Ike, who had a strong prejudice in favor of hot food. - -"Because we are afraid there are Indians near by." - -"Injuns!" exclaimed Ike, and he pressed his hands to the top of his -head, as if to keep down his rising scalp. - -"Yes; we must fill our canteens with water and move from here at once." - -"But whar to, Mistah Sam?" - -"To the shelter of some rocks not far from the head of this ravine. Let -the fire go, Wah Shin, we can get along without it to-night." - -"Me no likee bad Injun; me no kalee fo' fi'," said Wah Shin, as he -kicked over the pile of fuel, and hurriedly began to fill the four -canteens. - -The sun had set and the chilling shadows were creeping up from the -cañons, in which they seemed to have their home during the day, when Sam -and Ulna led the way into the broad plateau of the upper world. - -The mass of rocks in which they sought shelter was close to the head of -the rift. - -The increasing darkness favored their reaching these rocks without being -seen by any one not near by. - -This was an admirable hiding place, and in the event of trouble it had -every advantage for observation and defense. - -In the midst of these rocks they ate their supper, and Sam detailed the -guards for the night. - -His greatest fear was that the dog might reveal, by growling, their -hiding place to any who might come near. To guard against this as much -as possible, he fastened a rope muzzle about the dog's head and told Ike -to watch him. - -Some three hours of darkness had passed when Ike called out: - -"See har, Mistah Sam, this yar dog scents somethin' an' I can't hold him -to save my life." - - - - -CHAPTER XXV.--FROM SAFETY INTO DANGER. - - -It did not need the low growling of the dog to convince our young -friends that they were in the midst of danger. - -Along the trail leading up from the ravine, they could hear low, -gutteral voices, and they did not need to be told that the Apaches, whom -they had seen as the sun was setting, had come to the spring, for the -fall of moccasined feet could be heard dying out in that direction. - -"The Apaches!" whispered Sam, as he grasped Ulna's arm with one hand, -and clutched his rifle more tightly with the other. - -"Yes," was the reply. - -"Do you think they will discover us?" - -"They cannot help doing so." - -"What will be their next move after finding we are near by?" - -"They will trail us down." - -"To these rocks?" - -"Yes." - -"And then?" - -"And then if they find me they will see that the rising sun looks on one -less Ute in the world," was Ulna's reply, given with his habitual -calmness. - -"But we will fight," said Sam, stoutly. "And if it comes to dying, we -will die together, and the enemy will make nothing by it." - -"Ha! dey's startin' a fiah down dar by the spring," said Ike, who had -been peering through the darkness in the direction the Apaches had -taken. - -This was true. A column of luminous smoke, followed by a fountain of -sparks and flame, shot into the calm night air near the spring. - -The Indians were using the fuel Ike and Wah Shin had gathered, and by -the light of the dancing flames their slender, half-naked figures could -be seen. - -Sam counted thirteen warriors. All appeared to be well armed with -rifles, and the red paint on their faces told that they were out on no -mission of peace. - -"I will go out and try to learn their purpose," said Ulna, as he slung -his rifle on his back, and tightened his belt. - -"But they may catch you," said Sam. - -"I will see that they don't." - -"Can you understand them if you hear them speak?" - -"Yes, as well as if they were Utes. It is better that I should go, and -if I find that it will be wiser not to return, remember I shall either -escape to Hurley's Gulch, or stay so close that I can be of service if -needed. But, if it can be avoided, do not bring on a fight with these -people." - -Sam was about to protest against Ulna's course, but before he could -utter a word the young Ute had sprung lightly over the rocks, and was -making his way to the spring. - -For the first time since leaving Gold Cave Camp Sam Willett felt -thoroughly alarmed. - -He had fearlessly faced the storm and stood undaunted in the presence of -Nature in her most awful aspects, without losing heart for a moment, but -the presence of these savages--ignorant and bloodthirsty--made him -tremble for the safety of his dear father, to whose rescue he was -straining every nerve to come. - -Ulna's daring and seemingly reckless conduct filled Sam with alarm, for -apart from his great regard for that youth, he knew that he could not -offer a strong resistance to the Apaches with only the inexpert Ike and -Wah Shin to depend on. - -"I wouldn't ha' did wat Ulna's done," said Ike, in a frightened whisper. -"No, not for fifty hundred thousand million dollars in goold an' solit -dimeints." - -"No catchee dis chile do so much like foolee," said Wah Shin, with a -shudder at the thought. - -"Hist! Keep still and stop the dog's growling," said Sam sternly, as -from his perch, higher up, he tried to make out what the Indians were -doing down by the fire, and if possible to discover Ulna. - -Meantime Ulna, moving as silently as the shadows that came and went -about the fire near the spring, made his way toward the enemy. - -He walked so erect and quickly that it would seem as if it were his -purpose to go directly to the fire, but he took care to keep a rock -between him and the enemy. - -When within fifty yards of the spring he dropped on his hands and knees, -and without stopping, crept quickly forward. - -When he got so close to the fire that he could distinctly hear what the -Apaches were talking about, he came to a stop, and lying close to the -ground, he bent eagerly forward to listen. - -The leader of this band was a man named Blanco, which is the Spanish -word for white, though in this case it seemed to be misapplied. - -Blanco's repulsive appearance was increased by the fact that he had only -one eye--like Badger. - -The chief and his companions had already discovered that the spring had -been recently visited, and they very naturally inferred from the tracks -of shoes that they had been made by white men. - -Nor did the impress of the moccasins escape their keen eyes. - -"One Ute, three white men," were the first words Ulna heard when he got -within hearing distance of the Apaches. - -"Where did they come from?" asked a brave, who by the aid of a torch had -been examining the tracks lower down the ravine. - -"It looks as if they came by way of the Great Cañon," said one. - -"Ugh!" grunted Blanco, "I don't believe that." - -"But the trail leads that way," persisted the man who held the torch. - -"I don't care if it led into the sky." - -"If it did, Blanco, you could not see it, and though our medicine-men -say that people in the times far past came from the sky, I never heard -of their bringing dogs with them," said the man with the torch. - -"Dogs!" exclaimed the band in chorus. - -"No; one dog." - -"Where is it?" asked the chief. - -"Here is the track," and the man held the torch down and showed the -impress of Maj's feet on the ground. - -"No, that's a wolf," said the chief. - -"The foot of the mountain wolf is not so large," said the keen observer, -"nor has it long hairs on its toes as has the creature that made this -track." - -Like all leaders, the chief did not like to be so openly contradicted by -one under him, and he was again about to protest that he was right, and -it was a wolf that had been at the spring, when, as if to set all doubts -at rest, the fierce barking of a dog could be heard at the top of the -hill and not more than two hundred yards away. - -Maj, in some way, had slipped his muzzle and escaped Ike's hold and was -now making himself heard outside the rocks, among which Sam and his -friends were hiding. - -The instant the Indians heard the sound they seized their arms and -sprang away from the light of the fire. - -As luck, rather than design, had it, they ran in the direction where -Ulna was hiding, and before he could think of rising to his feet they -were about him. - -The brave fellow stuck close to the ground, and he might have escaped -had not one of the Apaches stumbled and fell on top of him. - -The savage gave a yell of fear, but at the same instant he seized Ulna -and held him fast. - -"What is wrong there?" demanded the chief, as he hurried in the -direction from which the cry came. - -"A Ute! a Ute!" was the response of the man whom Ulna was making a -desperate effort to cast off. - -In an instant every brave had fallen on Ulna, and, almost as quickly, he -was bound hand and foot, but he uttered neither cry nor groan to show -the pain nor to tell of his mental anguish. - -"Who are you?" asked Blanco, bending over him. - -"I am a Ute," was the reply. - -"Have you a name?" - -"I have." - -"What is it?" - -"Ulna." - -"What! the nephew of the hated Uray?" - -"The nephew of the great chief, Uray." - -"You come alone?" - -"No, with friends." - -"Utes?" - -"No, miners from Gold Cave Camp." - -"How came you here?" - -"Through the cañon." - -"And you want me to believe that?" - -"I ask you to believe nothing; I tell the truth," said Ulna proudly and -half-defiantly. - -"Who ever went through the Great Cañon and lived?" said the Apache in a -calmer tone. - -"We have," said Ulna. - -"How many of you?" - -"Four and a dog." - -"And where are the others?" - -"They are where they can defy a foe or welcome a friend," said Ulna with -undaunted spirit. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVI.--THE TRIAL ENDS. - - -Mr. Willett, like every American of intelligence, not only knew a great -deal about the laws of the country of which he was proud of being a -citizen, but he also knew as well as most lawyers the methods by which -trials were conducted in the regularly organized courts of justice. - -In addition to this he saw that the men who had gathered to try him and -Hank Tims, though anxious to follow the forms as they understood them, -were very ignorant, and like all their class, had a profound respect for -those who knew more, or seemed to know more, than themselves. - -The jury was composed of twelve rough, sturdy men, who looked as if they -fully realized their duty. - -Even the judge sat more erect and tried to look dignified at the risk of -being ridiculous. - -"Now we're all ready to begin, and I want order in the court. The gents -as has thar hats on will take 'em off and hold 'em in thar hands," said -the judge, again rapping with the heavy glass on the little pine table -by his side. - -The "gents" promptly took off their hats, and this was followed by the -scraping of boots and a chorus of little coughs that told how nervous -all were. - -"Now," continued the judge when order was restored, "we'll have the -witnesses in and go on with the trial." - -"Before you call any witnesses," said Mr. Willett, "I want you or -whoever is conducting this case to state the charge against me and my -friend Hank Tims." - -"We can't have everything har like if it was a reg'lar out-and-out -court," said the judge angrily, and again picking up the tumbler as if -he were going to hurl it at some one. "And as for the charges, I thought -every one in and about Hurley's Gulch knowed that you two is charged -with robbin' and murderin' poor Tom Edwards. Thar, I hope that statement -of the case will suit the most partic'lar." - -"I and my companion, being the most interested," said Mr. Willett, with -wonderful calmness, "should be the most particular; but if that is the -best statement of the case that can be made, I am willing that you shall -go ahead, asking only that I be permitted to cross-question any and all -witnesses that may be called." - -"This court ain't got any objections as it knows on to yer axin' -questions, pervidin' you stick right down to the point," growled the -judge. - -Nodding to show that he was satisfied with this, Mr. Willett said, "I am -ready," and the young man acting as clerk called out: - -"Badger!" - -Badger moved nearer to the judge and began to twirl his hat in his big, -rough hands in a way that showed he was anything but calm. - -"Now, Badger," said Judge Jacks, "tell this yar court and this yar jury -all you know 'bout the case." - -Badger looked into his hat as if he saw something there that might -refresh his memory, and then, after coughing and casting his malignant -eye up at the ceiling, he began: - -"Wa'al, this is 'bout all I knows 'bout this case. You see, me and Tom -Edwards had been ole pards, and so I knowed him as well as any man this -side the Rockies. He wasn't a bad kind of a feller to them as knowed how -to take him, and though he didn't have much book larnin'----" - -Here Mr. Willett interrupted Badger to say: - -"This evidence, your honor, is not to the point. We are not here to -discuss the character of the dead man, but to find out if we can who -murdered him." - -"Reckon yer right," said the judge, and then he told Badger he must -"stick to bottom facts." - -Thus admonished Badger resumed: - -"Me and Mr. Shirley got to Hurley's Gulch the night before Tom was did -for so cruel bad, and we found he was on a spree, and complainin' to -every one that Mr. Willett he was a-tryin' to euchre him out of fifteen -hundred dollars, as he'd 'greed to pay for the claim over at Gold Cave -Camp. Wa'al, the next mornin' 'bout an hour or so afore day me and Mr. -Shirley was sleepin' together when we heard two pistol shots and a man -a-hollerin' "murder." We hurried out and found poor Tom all shot to -pieces. We carried him into this yar hotel, and with his dyin' last -breath he told us that it was Mr. Willett and Hank Tims as did for him. -Thar, that's all I knows 'bout the case." - -My young readers will notice that there was no oath administered to -Badger, nor would such a sacred proceeding have affected in any way the -nature of his evidence. - -"Now you've heard Badger's evidence," said the judge, with an angry -glance at Mr. Willett and Hank. "Have you any questions to ax him?" - -"I have a few," said Mr. Willett. - -"Well, rattle 'em off quick." - -"Badger," began Mr. Willett, "what is your business?" - -"I'm a miner," was the answer. - -"Where do you mine?" - -"I ain't at work--jist now." - -"How long have you been at Hurley's Gulch?" - -"Off and on, 'bout a month." - -"You came here broke?" - -"Yes. I wasn't flush, I'll allow." - -"But you are flush now?" - -"Wa'al, I've got a few dollars." - -"Where did you get your money?" - -"That's my business," said Badger, angrily. - -"Yes," said the judge, "no gent ain't bound to tell no one how he came -by his money--unless some one else goes to work and claims it as his'n." - -"My object is to show that Badger received his money from Frank -Shirley," said Mr. Willett. - -"And what if he did?" asked the judge. - -"There is this about it, that if Badger is in Frank Shirley's employ, -then he is working to get me and my son out of the way, for if my son -dies before he's twenty-one years of age, then Shirley falls heir to a -large fortune." - -"We ain't a-tryin' Frank Shirley. So I ain't agoin' to let you ax any -sich questions," said the judge, rapping vigorously on the table. - -Still calm, if not confident, Mr. Willett asked: - -"Badger, were not you and Frank Shirley dressed when you say you heard -those shots?" - -"Wa'al, yes, except our boots," replied Badger. - -"And you were awake?" - -"No; but I can't say I was sleepin' heavy." - -"_Badger, did not you kill Tom Edwards?_" - -This question came with the suddenness of an explosion, and it so -staggered Badger that it was fully a minute before he could stammer out: - -"No. Who said I did?" - -"I say it! You committed the murder at Shirley's bidding, so as to get -me out of the way, and you prompted the murdered man whom you shot down -in the darkness to say I did it," said Mr. Willett with a forceful -manner that startled all. - -During the confusion that followed this bold but perfectly just -accusation, Badger left the witness-stand and mixed in with the -astonished crowd. - -Frank Shirley was next called, but as his evidence was much the same as -that given by Badger, it is unnecessary to record it. - -On his cross-examination, he claimed to have no ill-feeling against Mr. -Willett or his son; and he had the boldness to claim that he did not -want young Sam's fortune, as he was rich in his own right. - -Two other witnesses were called to prove the dying words of Tom Edwards, -and on these and the fact that Mr. Willett had no evidence to prove that -he had paid for the claim at Gold Cave Camp, the whole case hung. - -Mr. Willett testified in his own behalf. - -He told such a clear, straightforward story that, for the time being, -even his enemies were impressed with its truth. - -In a tremulous voice he spoke about his beloved son, whom he feared to -be dead, and he said, in conclusion: - -"Had it not been for the cruel flood that snatched from me my boy, the -only tie that holds me to earth, he would have been here with the paper -bearing Tom Edwards' signature, and then you would have seen that I -could have no reason for desiring the death of this man, whose -drunkenness made him his own worst enemy." - -After this Hank Tims told all he knew, corroborating Mr. Willett, and -boldly asserting that he was present when Mr. Willett paid the money to -Tom Edwards. - -Collins and Si Brill testified that they had known Hank "off and on" for -many years, and that no man, up to this time had ever dared to say a -word against his truthfulness or honesty. - -"Wa'al," said the judge, when the evidence was all in, "I give it as my -opinion, that them two men, Willett and Tims, kilt Tom Edwards. I don't -believe thar stories for a minute. Men that commit crime will lie to -hide it every time, and don't you gentlemen of the jury go for to make -any mistake about it. - -"Thar, that's all I've got to say. Now let the jury take thar time and -fetch in a verdict that'll suit all hands. I ain't got anythin' more to -say. The evidence is all in, and so, till the time comes to say the -prizners is guilty or innocent the trial is jest 'bout over." - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII.--THE APACHES HAVE THEIR WAY. - - -If an earthquake had shaken the rocks about his ears, Sam could not have -been more shocked and startled than he was at the barking of the dog. - -As for Ike, he was rendered speechless, for Maj had darted away without -any apparent effort to hold him back. - -"Ah, golly!" gasped Wah Shin, "de fat am allee gone in de file!" - -Although Maj had done all the damage possible, for Sam could see by the -movements of the Indians that they had heard the barking, yet he did not -provoke his young master to anger. - -Sam sprang down, caught the dog by the collar and pulled him back to -their hiding place. - -"I--I wish we'd a left dat ar dorg back home!" cried Ike. "He ain't did -no good eber sence we started, but to eat up de grub; an' now he goes -an' makes a fuss, jest whin we most wanted foh him to keep his tongue to -hisself." - -"See that he does not get out again," said Sam. "After all the dog only -led the Indians to a discovery which they must have made sooner or -later. Ah, I wish Ulna had not gone out. He knows the habits of these -people and he would know what to do." - -"De man as knows what to do ondah dese yer sarcumstances," groaned Ike, -"is a heap sight smarter'n me." - -"Plenty men know heap mo' den you," said Wah Shin, who was evidently in -a bad humor. "You don' know 'nuff gettee in out lain." - -"Hist! Keep still," said Sam, who had again clambered to his perch on -the rock that commanded a view of the fire. "I can see men coming this -way." - -"Oh, laws a massy!" cried Ike, and with one hand he held the dog, while -with the other he pressed his lips, "to keep from hollerin' right out," -as he afterward expressed it. - -Sam was not mistaken as to the movements of the Apaches. A number of -them, led by their chief, had left Ulna in charge of the others and -advanced boldly to the head of the ravine. - -As a proof that they had no fear of the party they were in search of, -one of the braves carried a torch, which he brandished above his head -till he seemed to walk amid a fountain of sparks. - -Taking a position where he could see without being seen, Sam, with an -anxiously beating heart, watched the oncoming braves. - -They approached to within about fifty yards of the rocks in which the -little band had sought refuge, and came to a sudden halt. - -Sam was wondering what would happen next, when, to his great surprise, -the chief called out: - -"Hello, white mans! Hello!" - -The Indian spoke broken English in a way that no combination of letters -could give a correct idea of, so for our own convenience, as well as for -the reader's clearer understanding, we shall report what he said in the -ordinary way, though Indians never use the elegant language some writers -put into their mouths. - -"What do you want?" was Sam's response to the Indian's outcry. - -"Who you are?" asked the Indian. - -"My name is Sam Willett." - -"Where you come from?" - -"From the cañon." - -"Oh, no; that's a Ute lie." - -"I did not ask you to believe me, nor do I care to talk to you. Go off -about your business, if you have any," said Sam, his confidence -increasing every moment that he spoke. - -"You got dog?" - -"Yes." - -"Big dog?" - -"A very big dog." - -"Him bite?" - -"Yes, if you come nearer." - -"That dog fat?" - -At this question the Indians laughed and jumped about, as if they -thought their chief had uttered a very fine joke, for to the Apache a -fat dog is the daintiest dish in all the world. - -Sam treated the inquiry about Maj's condition with haughty silence, -while all the time the animal under consideration was growling and -straining to break away from Ike, as if eager to exhibit his condition -and his teeth. - -"You all white men?" was Blanco's next question. - -"No--not all," shouted Sam. - -"Who you three be?" - -"I shan't tell you." - -"Why you no tell?" - -"Because it is none of your business." - -"Dat am de gospil truff," said Ike, "an' if he don't light out purty -soon dar'll be a loose dog a-howlin' 'round, for I can't hold onter Maj -much longer." - -"My name Blanco. Me big Apache chief." - -"Well, what do you want?" asked Sam. - -"Me very good man." - -"I am glad to hear it." - -"Me and all my men, good friends to whites." - -"And I am a good friend to the Indians; if you let me alone, I shall let -you alone. Good-night," said Sam, hoping that the Indian might prove -sensitive and take this as a hint to leave, but he had entirely mistaken -his man. - -"When sun come up then where you go?" asked the chief, with the same -inquisitive manner. - -At this juncture it struck Sam that he might be able not only to make -these people his friends, but to utilize them in getting to his father, -so he said in a kindlier tone than he had yet used: - -"We are going to Hurley's Gulch." - -"You live there?" - -"I want to get there. Do you know the _shortest_ road?" - -This was asked as if Sam might be well acquainted with the longest road -himself. - -"Oh, yes," said the chief. - -"If you guide me--by the shortest way--to Hurley's Gulch to-morrow -morning, I will give you money, rifles, pistols, knives, blankets, and -lots of other good things," said Sam with lavish generosity. - -"You got money, rifles, knives, blankets, all good things with you here, -eh?" asked the chief. - -"We have all the arms we need for our own defense, and we know how to -use them. But you guide me to Hurley's Gulch, and I will keep my word," -said Sam, with more confidence than he felt. - -Instead of replying at once to this generous proposition, the chief -spoke with his followers for some minutes in low, guttural tones. - -Sam could hear the murmur of their voices, and he rightly guessed that -they were discussing whether to accept his offer in good faith, or to -kill and rob himself and his companions. - -"We see you, sun up; you no leave," called out the chief at length. - -"You must make up your mind to-night, for I am going to leave early in -the morning," said Sam. - -"Oh, all right. I on hand," was the chief's reply. - -Again they consulted together, and Sam could see that four men remained -behind to watch, while the others, with the chief, went down to the -fire. - -All this time Sam was in great trouble about Ulna, for he did not even -suspect that he was a prisoner in the hands of his cruel tribal foes. - -Ike and Wah Shin were in great tribulation about themselves, for they -had no faith in the Indians; indeed, they firmly believed that the -Apaches would scalp them all on the morrow. - -Ike gave expression to his feelings in the remark: - -"When we was down in that yar canyon den I felt ez if I'd rudder be in -any odder place in dis worl', or de nex'; but now I'd a heap sight -sooner be down dar dan up yar." - -Though tired and sleepy, Sam could not think of closing his eyes that -night, for he feared to trust Ike or Wah Shin on guard, and he half -expected an attack from the Apaches before morning. - -He knew that any attempt at escape would be detected, and might hasten -the struggle he was so anxious to avoid. - -More than once he wished himself back in the cañon, but the thought that -he was nearer to his father, and the hope that after all the Indians -might not be so bad as he feared, gave him courage to face the future. - -He knew that resistance against such a force, and with his own limited -supply of food and water, would be downright folly. So when the chief -appeared before the rocks, just as the sun was rising, he went out to -meet him, and shook hands with him. - -"Me come down to water, eat something," said the chief, in what seemed a -hospitable spirit. - -[Illustration: _Sam went out to meet the chief and shook hands with -him._] - -Sam, Ike, and Wah Shin took up their bundles and with the dog, went back -to the spring. - -Here to their amazement and horror they found Ulna lying near the fire -with his hands and feet bound. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVIII.--A BOLD MOVE. - - -We have already seen that Sam was cool and brave, and such characters -but rarely act from impulse. Yet there are times when impulse is more -effective than all the calm reasoning in the world, and this was one of -them. - -On the way to the spring with Blanco, Sam felt very nervous. He did not -have much faith in the chief's profession of friendship for the whites, -and from what he remembered of Hank Tims' stories about the Apaches, he -believed them to be a very treacherous and bloodthirsty people. - -But the sight of Ulna, prostrate and bound, scattered all Sam's fears -and indecision to the winds. - -"This is my friend!" he shouted as he sprung to Ulna's side and drew his -own hunting-knife. - -"Hold! He is a Ute and my foe!" roared the chief. - -But neither his words nor his movements could stay Sam Willett, who was -now blind to everything but the condition of his brave friend. - -Two rapid flashes of the knife, and the cords that bound Ulna's hands -and feet were severed. - -Ike and Wah Shin trembled at the audacity of their young leader. - -Even Blanco and his braves were speechless and helpless for the moment, -and looked from one to the other, as if wondering what this -extraordinary young white man would do next. - -They had not long to wonder, for Ulna, in the very second that he was -freed, sprang to his feet, leaped at the nearest Indian, who chanced to -hold the repeating-rifle that had been taken from himself the night -before, and tearing it from his grasp, he bounded up the ravine before a -hand could be raised to stay him. - -"Shoot! shoot!" cried the chief when he could regain his breath. - -"Don't fire!" shouted Sam as, with his own gun raised, he sprang -directly in front of the Apaches. - -They did not fire, perhaps because it would have been useless, for -before they had fully realized the order of the chief and why it was -called out, the fleet-footed Ulna had vanished up the rift. - -Blanco shouted for the braves to pursue, and on the instant four of the -youngest and most active leaped forward, like blood-hounds freed from -the leash. - -With yells that frightened the dog and made him crouch behind Ike, the -Apaches started up the ravine. - -Sam was about to follow them, but the chief caught him by the shoulder -and said sternly: - -"You do heap harm. Stay!" - -Meanwhile, Ulna had gained the upland, with his face turned toward the -sun, now flashing over the crests of the Sierra Madre Mountains. - -The cruel cords had cut into his wrists and ankles, and the strained -position in which he had been held so many hours had stiffened his -limbs; but, absorbed in the battle for his own life, he forgot or did -not feel his pain. - -On gaining the upland, he halted for an instant to pull his cap lower -and to tighten his belt; then, as he heard the blood-curdling yells -behind him, he started off again, running this time straight for the -mountains to the east. - -He looked back for an instant, to see the four Apaches rising into view -from the rift. - -He had about two hundred yards the lead, and he very wisely made up his -mind not to increase it. - -As a tribe, the Utes have ever prided themselves on the speed and -endurance of their runners. - -They begin to practice as children, and they are taught to stop at no -obstacle and not to vary their speed, whether facing or descending a -hill. - -They keep the lips firmly closed, breathing altogether through the -nostrils, and the arms, or at least the elbows, are kept firmly pressed -to the sides, the hands being advanced at right angles to the body and -the fingers shut, like a boxer's fist. - -An observer, seeing Ulna's light, springy bound and the absence of all -effort, would have been charmed with the grace of the youth's movements, -but would have felt that he was not getting over the ground very fast, -while his pursuers appeared to be flying; and they were certainly -straining every nerve. - -But Ulna's feet were on his native heath, and he knew that his safety -depended on reserving his strength, rather than exhausting himself by a -mighty effort at the start. - -The four runners behind him discharged their rifles, but the bullets -whistled harmlessly by his ears. - -They yelled, and he heard them with a feeling of delight, for he well -knew that men cannot run fast and yell very loud at the same time. - -Still the Apaches seemed to gain on him, till his lead was reduced to -not more than fifty yards, and he could hear their loud explosive -breathings behind him. - -Gradually three of the young braves began to lessen their speed and drop -to the rear, while one appeared to gain at every bound on the fugitive. - -After running for more than hour, Ulna threw a quick glance over his -shoulder and took in this state of affairs. - -His heart bounded with delight at the prospect, but he neither increased -nor lessened his speed. His movements seemed to be as even and tireless -as the flight of the mountain eagles circling above his head. - -Another half hour and he looked back again. Only one man was in sight, -and he was not more than a hundred feet away. - -Quick as a flash Ulna came to a halt, wheeled and fired. The Apache -threw up his arms and fell senseless at the feet of the young Ute. - -Here Ulna's training in the missionary school at Taos came into play. - -His natural impulse would have led him to make sure work, and tear the -black scalp from the head of his foe, but his heart was touched with -pity rather than hate, and now that his pursuer was harmless he might -help him, if he was not fatally wounded. - -He examined the Apache's wound, and found that the bullet had struck his -head without breaking his skull. - -"He will come to himself after a while," said Ulna, as he drew his foe -to the shadow of a rock and placed his back against it. - -But while prompted to this act of humanity, Ulna did not permit his -heart to interfere with his head. According to all the rules of -civilized warfare, the arms of an enemy belong to his conqueror, so he -took the Apache's pistol and ammunition-belt, which also contained his -long, keen scalping-knife. - -These he fastened on his own person, and had scarcely finished when the -wounded brave opened his eyes and looked about him in a dazed way. As -soon as he saw Ulna he closed his eyes again and began to chant in a low -solemn voice the death-song of his tribe. - -He was in the power of his foe, and as he could not give mercy himself, -for he did not know of such a thing, he expected that the Ute would put -him to death, and his song told that he was ready to meet it without -fear. - -"Listen to me," said Ulna, laying his hand on the Apache's shoulder and -speaking in a firm but kindly tone. "I am a Ute, but the whites have -taught me to hate no man because of his tribe. Your life is your own; -take it and make your way back to your friends who have lagged in the -race, and tell them that the nephew of Uray does not hate nor kill the -helpless." - -"But I am an Apache. I have forfeited my life. I would take yours if I -could. Why stay your hand? This is not the warfare that our fathers -practised," said the astonished Apache. - -"No, nor shall I ever practice such a warfare. Yet for the life I spare -I would ask a favor." - -"What is it?" - -"Return to Blanco and tell him that the people now in his hands mean no -harm. Tell him that if he guides them to Hurley's Gulch he will be well -paid. Tell him that if he harms them, the whites will make war, nor stay -their hands while there is an Apache left in the Mogollon Mountains." - -With the last word Ulna waved his hand to the brave and sped away again -to the eastward with the same tireless spring. - -Ulna was miles away when the three Apaches, who had started out with the -wounded man, made their appearance. - -"Where is the Ute?" they asked. - -"Gone," was the reply. - -"And your arms?" - -"They are gone, too." - -"Who took them?" - -"The Ute." - -"Why then did he not take your life and your scalp?" they asked in great -surprise. - -"He stunned me with a shot which I was not expecting; but he stunned me -more when he refused the death I was expecting," said the brave. - - - - -CHAPTER XXIX.--THE VERDICT AND SENTENCE. - - -In order that the jury might think over and discuss the evidence against -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims it was decided to leave them in full -possession of the tent in which the trial was held. - -"When you've got yer minds made up," said the man who had been acting as -judge, "let me know, and I'll come in and pass sentence." - -This fellow had started out to convict the accused men, and, as we have -seen, he let slip no chance to impress his prejudices on the jury. - -Collins and Si Brill with two others, who had been the original guards, -took charge of the prisoners while the jury were making up their minds, -though Badger insisted that he should have the prisoners in his keeping. - -"If I ain't to have 'em," he protested, "whar was the good of 'lectin' -me sheriff?" - -"Not a bit of good," sneered Collins, "and if you'd had any spunk you -wouldn't have took the place. Now, take my advice and git." - -Badger did "git," that is, he sought out Frank Shirley, whom he found in -the bar-room surrounded by a great crowd of men, who were drinking at -his expense and discussing the verdict at the same time. - -It seemed to be the opinion of nearly all present that the jury would -soon bring in a verdict of "Guilty of the crime charged." - -"If they don't do that," said the landlord, "then I'll tell you what I'm -in for." - -"What's that?" asked Badger. - -"I'm in for hangin' every man on the jury, and the prizners with 'em, -before the sun sets." - -A cheer showed the favor with which this proposition was received. - -When Shirley could get away from the crowd, he and Badger went down by -the creek where they could talk without being overheard. - -"Well, Badger, what do you think?" asked Shirley. - -"'Bout the verdict?" - -"Yes." - -"No one can't think but one way after the evidence. Why, nothin' could -be stronger." - -"That's so; but do you think any one suspects?" asked Shirley, -nervously. - -"Suspects what?" - -"That we put up the whole job." - -"Not a soul," said Badger. - -"I wish I could think that." - -"But you can think it." - -"You forget what Mr. Willett asked you when he was cross-examining." - -"What was that?" - -"His question was, '_Badger, did not you kill Tom Edwards?_'" - -As Frank Shirley repeated these words he looked into Badger's face and -saw the color flying and the thick lips trembling. - -"Why do you speak in that kind of a way to me?" stammered Badger. "Ain't -I stuck by you and did what I said? And so far as the killin' of Tom -Edwards is consarned, didn't you help plan the job, and didn't you stand -by while I carried it out?" - -"That is all true, Badger; but I am not going back on you----" - -"Then why do you speak that way?" - -"Because I want you to understand that Willett suspects the whole truth. -Indeed, he stated the case from beginning to end as if he knew all about -it." - -"Wa'al, if he does, I didn't tell him." - -"Of course not, Badger; but you must see that those who think Willett -and Hank Tims innocent will at once say, 'Some one killed Tom Edwards, -and we should find the guilty parties.'" - -"And that's the thought that skeers you?" - -"I must confess, Badger, it makes me feel very uneasy," said Shirley. - -"I thought you had more nerve." - -"I am not lacking in that, but caution is better than nerve; and I've -been thinking that the sooner we can get out of this place the better." - -"I'll allow yer right thar, Mr. Shirley; but if we was to get away in a -hurry, them that suspects us would foller up and hunt us down like wild -beasts. Why, Collins, he's jest a spilin' to have a fuss with us, and -I'm bound that he shan't, for he's powerful ugly with a six-shooter." - -"Still, I want to get away. There is no doubt in my mind as to the fate -of young Sam." - -"Thar shouldn't be, for thar ain't no more doubt about him and all the -rest of his gang bein' drownded than thar is that that jury over thar -will bring in a verdict of guilty," and Badger jerked his head in the -direction of the canvas hotel. - -"And they will hang the prisoners?" - -"You can bet they will, and in short order, too." - -"To-day?" - -"Yes, to-day." - -"Then my mission will be accomplished, and it would be folly to stay an -hour in this savage hole if I can get out of it and go to wealth and -friends." - -"And I'll stick by you, no fear of that, leastwise till I get my share -of the swag, and then I think I'll marry and try to lead a more -decentish life than I have been doin'----" - -Badger was stopped in his statement of good resolutions by a loud cheer -coming from the hotel. - -"Halloo! what's that?" asked Shirley. - -"It must be the vardict; let us go and see," replied Badger, and he at -once started off in the direction of the noise, followed by his nervous -employer. - -Badger was right in his guess. - -The jury had sent out word that they had agreed on a verdict. - -The preceding excitement was great, but it was calmness itself compared -with that that stirred the miners when it became known that the jury -were ready to report. - -From the bar and the tents and huts round about men poured into the -place of trial. - -Badger had to run to get up in time, for he did not see how business -could go on without the presence of the sheriff. - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims sat in the place they had occupied during the -trial. - -The judge, flushed with liquor, took his place and rapped and shouted -for order. - -The twelve jurymen and the prisoners were the only calm persons present, -and even their faces showed that they fully appreciated the situation. - -When the judge, after breaking the heavy glass and splintering the -little pine table by his side had succeeded in getting the mob down, he -turned to the jury and said: - -"Gents, have you got a verdict?" - -"Yes," coughed the one acting as foreman. - -"All unanimous?" - -"Yes." - -"Wa'al, let's have it," said the judge. - -The silence became profound on the instant. - -Men with watches could hear them ticking, and men with hearts became -painfully aware of the fact. - -Though a big, strong fellow, the foreman was trembling when he rose to -his feet, and he tried to cough behind his hand several times before he -could get control of his voice. At length he managed to say: - -"We find that the two prizners is----" - -Here he stopped and coughed again, and he undoubtedly would have sat -down without finishing the sentence had not the judge shouted: - -"Wa'al, the prizners is what?" - -"_Guilty!_" came the reply. - -On hearing this Badger tried to lead a cheer with the help of the judge, -but as the farce was not yet over, some one cursed him and told him to -"shut up." - -"I don't well see how you could fotch in any other vardict," began the -judge. "Fact is, you couldn't have did it and continued to live among -the people at Hurley's Gulch that's in for law and order and fair play; -so I say you've all done yer duty nobly like good feller citizens." - -This opinion met with some applause; then the judge turned to Mr. -Willett and Hank, and in a voice intended to be very solemn, as it -certainly was very hoarse, he called out: - -"Presners at the bar stand up!" - -The two men rose, and Mr. Willett cast a quick glance over the crowd in -the hope of seeing the friendly faces of Collins and his partner, Si -Brill, but they were not in sight. - -"Have either of you men anythin' to say why I shouldn't now pass -sentence of death on you?" - -"Only this," said Mr. Willett: "that you will pass sentence of death on -innocent men." - -"It is the sentence of this court that the committee and the sheriff of -this yar court take you two prizners out of this place at once and hang -you both till you are dead, dead, dead!" said the judge, with a fierce -emphasis on the last word. - - - - -CHAPTER XXX.--SURPRISE FOR HURLEY'S GULCH. - - -On hearing the cruel sentence, something like a gasp of pain came from -many of the men who most firmly believed in the guilt of the prisoners. - -No man can ever become so degraded and hardened as not to be moved by -the approaching death of even a perfect stranger. - -Badger alone was delighted at having something to do with the trial, for -it was the sheriff's duty to attend to the execution. - -With the death of these two men, the work which he had pledged Shirley -to do would be completed. - -More than this, with the death of these two men he felt that all danger -to himself would vanish and all suspicion be allayed. - -"It's mighty hard lines, Mr. Willett," said Hank Tims as he shook his -fellow-prisoner's hand, "but one has to die sooner or later, and it -should comfort you and me at this time to know that we can leave this -world and stand in the presence of the Great Master and Chief of all, -feelin' that we ain't never done anythin' that should bring a blush of -shame to our cheeks nor a pang of regret to the friends as is left -behind." - -"True, Hank, true," said Mr. Willett as he stroked his brow. "Since I -have come to feel that my boy is dead, life has lost all its charms for -me and death its terrors. What is there to live for since he is gone? -Nothing!" and with a sigh of resignation Mr. Willett let his hands fall -heavily by his side. - -Badger, judging by his conduct on this occasion, must have had no little -experience in lynching affairs. He appeared before the prisoners with -ropes, and as resistance would have been useless, Mr. Willett and Hank -permitted the heartless wretch to tie their hands tightly behind their -backs. - -This over, he went to the members of the vigilance committee, who were -engaged in earnest conversation outside the tent. - -Having told them what he had done, Badger asked for instructions. - -"We're in a kind of a fix about this onpleasant business," said one. - -"Wot's the trouble?" asked Badger. - -"Thar ain't no trees big enough for the purpose within twenty miles of -this," said the man. - -"Then why can't they be blindfolded and shot?" asked Badger. - -"'Coz the judge said to hang 'em." - -"Wa'al, I don't think thar'll be any trouble in gettin' him to change -his mind," said Badger. "You see he must 'commydate the sentence to the -place." - -The vigilance committee meant to do right, and they were determined to -erect a scaffold on the cliff above the creek, and carry out the -sentence as it had been ordered. - -By the time these preparations were completed the sun was well down the -west. - -Another hour and darkness would fall upon the world and on the lives of -the condemned men. - -With more thoughtfulness than might have been expected from men of their -character, the crowd withdrew from the place in which the trial had been -held, leaving Mr. Willett and Hank alone. - -It is not for us to attempt to describe the secret thoughts and feelings -of the condemned men. - -They spoke but little. - -Once Hank looked about him and said: - -"I wonder what's become of Collins and Si Brill, they were kind to us, -and I'd like to shake hands with them and thank them before the ind -comes." - -"They must know how we feel toward them, Hank, and as to their absence, -it is my belief that they have gone away to avoid witnessing the -death--the murder of two innocent men that they are powerless to -prevent," said Mr. Willett. - -"Yes, that must be it. Wa'al, I never saw a lynchin' nor took part in -one, but I must confess I'd die a sight easier if I only knowed that -them two critters, Badger and Shirley, was sure to meet up with the ind -they deserve." - -"You may be sure, Hank, that justice will overtake them in the end. -Standing as you are, on the edge of the grave, would you exchange places -with either of these men?" - -"No, not if they was to throw in all the gold in the world to boot," -said Hank earnestly. - -"Then you see there is something which a good man dreads more than -death, Hank." - -"Yes, Mr. Willett, it's a black character and a black heart." - -Hank had just uttered this when the flap of the tent was pushed aside -and Badger entered, followed by a number of the committee. - -"Wa'al, gents," said Badger, "we're all ready." - -"And so are we," said Mr. Willett, as he and Hank rose to their feet and -stood side by side. - -"This ain't pleasant work," said one of the committee with a face and -manner that told he was heartily ashamed of his part in the business, -"but it's got to be did." - -Neither Mr. Willett nor Hank made any reply. - -Badger and the members of the committee were all armed to the teeth, and -forming about the prisoners, they marched them down to a platform that -projected over the cliff and from the further end of which two ropes -hung down. - -About this platform every man living in and about Hurley's Gulch, -excepting Si Brill and Collins, had gathered, even Frank Shirley, weak -and wicked, could not resist the temptation to see his cruel work -completed. - -The ropes were made ready and the condemned men were told they could -pray for five minutes. - -Instead of kneeling down both turned their faces to the setting sun, and -in all that crowd no one was calmer than they. - -Suddenly the painful stillness was broken by a cry that came from the -westward and the crowd, as one man turned in that direction. - -There, like a silhouette against the red face of the setting sun, they -saw a lithe figure, in the picturesque garb of a Ute Indian bounding -toward them. - -"It is Ulna!" some one shouted, "Ulna coming from the direction of the -great cañon!" - -"Hold! hold! hold! for your lives!" - -This was shouted by a dozen stalwart horsemen, Collins and Si Brill in -the lead, who came galloping to the place of execution from the east. - -As these men flung themselves from their saddles, Ulna, with compressed -lips and flashing eyes bounded through the crowd. - -At a glance he took in the situation, and then in a voice that rang -clear and high as a bugle blast along the cliffs he called out: - -"Sam Willett lives and he has the paper!" - -"And these men shall not die, if me and my friends can help it, and -we're inclined to think we can!" thundered Collins, as he drew Mr. -Willett and Hank back from the platform and severed the cords that bound -their arms. - -"And my boy still lives?" cried Mr. Willett, as he reached out his hands -to Ulna. - -"Yes, he lives; I left him this morning, and----" - -Mr. Willett heard no more. - -The resolute heart that could face death without a tremor, was all -overcome by this joyous revelation, and he fell fainting to the ground. - -"That's a Ute lie!" hissed Badger, to whose side Frank Shirley had come, -pale and trembling. - -While Hank and Si Brill were restoring Mr. Willett to consciousness, -Collins called out: - -"We'll see if it's a lie. Come, Ulna, my boy, tell us all about it, and -if any man tries to stop you I'll give him a chance to bite the end off -my revolver." - -The coming of the young Ute, being unexpected, caused more of a -sensation than the execution of the prisoners would have done. - -The mob with bated breath gathered about Ulna, and though he was wearied -with his run of fifty miles over a rough, trackless country, he told the -main points of his thrilling story in a way that convinced everyone of -the truth of his report. - -For men to go down to death is an old story, but when those mourned for -as dead appear in the flesh, even those not superstitious are inclined -to wonder and to feel that a miracle has been performed. - -"Do you believe that young Indian's story?" asked Shirley after he had -led Badger away from the crowd. - -"I am afraid it's true," said Badger. - -"Then we're beaten!" groaned Shirley. - -"Not yet." - -"What can be done, Badger?" - -"If young Sam is alive he will try to reach here." - -"Yes; there can be no doubt of that." - -"Then he should be met on the way." - -"By whom?" - -"By us." - -"If so, we should start at once." - -"Yes, Mr. Shirley, there is not a minute to spare. Let us get our horses -and start as soon as it's dark," said Badger, with unusual -determination. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXI.--HOW IT FARED WITH SAM AND HIS FRIENDS. - - -When darkness came, the night of Ulna's arrival at Hurley's Gulch, it -found the camp excited about the existence of Tom Edwards' -receipt--which it was claimed young Sam had--and, as a consequence the -miners were divided as to the guilt or innocence of Mr. Willett and Hank -Tims. - -Three-fifths of the men believed that the prisoners were fairly tried, -justly condemned and that they should have been hanged. - -Indeed, these fellows felt that Collins, Si Brill and the men they had -brought with them to prevent the execution were no better than a pack of -outlaws. - -All the men at Hurley's Gulch carried pistols, as a matter of course, -but now they armed themselves with rifles, for the purpose of destroying -Collins and his friends, if they did not at once surrender the -prisoners. - -From comparative peace the camp was plunged into a state of war, with -rival factions ready to slay each other, in order that they might take -or save the lives of Mr. Willett and Hank Tims. - -Leaving Hurley's Gulch to its enraged rival factions, let us turn to the -west and see how it fared with Sam Willett and his friends. - -In the wild excitement of battle, soldiers, who hitherto may have -secretly doubted their own courage, have been known to perform deeds of -the most heroic valor, of which they retained not the slightest memory -when the conflict was over. - -This was Sam's case. - -His manner of freeing Ulna was bold to the verge of madness; but the -instant he saw the young Ute vanishing at the head of the rift, he -forgot all about the manner by which his release had been effected. - -The anger of the chief, Blanco, was so great when he saw what Sam had -done that he would have slain that daring youth without doubt had he not -feared that in so doing he might lose his own life. - -"What you do them for?" roared the chief, as he pointed after the -fugitive. - -"He was my friend," was all Sam could say, for by this time he had only -the haziest conception of what he had actually done. - -"He was the foe of my tribe." - -"You did not know him." - -"You do me bad," said the enraged chief. "You take Ute's place. My -people no stand what you do. I like be your friend. You friend of Ute's. -No my friend." - -The chief snapped the fingers of both hands and turned to talk with his -remaining braves. - -"Mistah Sam! Mistah Sam!" whispered Ike. - -"What is it, Ike?" - -"W'at you tink now?" - -"About what?" - -"'Bout de sitooation?" - -"I don't know," said Sam gloomily. - -"Tink we's in a bad box?" - -"If we are we must bear it." - -"Jest so; but somehow I'd like a change to good luck, jest to see how it -feels like. 'Peers to me ez if we was nebber to hab no good times no -more," and Ike rolled his eyes and sighed at a great rate. - -"W'at say me cookee blekfas'?" said Wah Shin, in whom the desire to be -at work was stronger than his fear of the savages. - -"I don't think they'll let you cook," said Sam. - -"Den me tly. Dey say 'no,' den me stopee. Let 'em hab way." - -Wah Shin opened the bundle, took out the few remaining rabbits, and -going over to the fire, he deliberately raked the coals and began to -warm the decidedly simple breakfast. - -The Apaches offered no objections to the actions of the Chinaman, though -they watched him with the eager curiosity of children at a circus. - -The Apaches make a bread from the pounded roots of the maguey or -mountain aloe, of which they always carry a supply when on their war -forays or hunting expeditions. - -This bread is sweet and nutritious, and that it will keep for a long -time in its original state is shown by the fact that the recorder of -these stirring incidents has still in his possession some of this bread, -which he obtained in the mountains of Arizona fifteen years ago. - -The odor of the rabbits on the coals reached the nostrils of the chief, -and it must have soothed his anger somewhat, for he spoke to his -companions in the Apache tongue, and they at once pulled a lot of this -bread from their buckskin haversacks--it resembled plugs of very black -tobacco and tasted better than it looked--and they gave Sam, Ike and Wah -Shin each a piece. - -"This is all the food we have left," said Sam, addressing the chief and -pointing to the rabbits, "but we shall be glad to share with you, and if -you guide us to Hurley's Gulch I will pledge my word that you shall have -all I promised you before." - -The chief replied to this with a grunt that showed he was still far from -feeling good-natured, still he proved that he was not only very hungry, -but also very selfish, by devouring one of the four rabbits without -asking any outside assistance. - -Ike witnessed this performance in open-eyed wonder, and he could not -resist whispering to Sam: - -"I've seed a good many hogs in my time, but that ar Injun as went an' -eat a hull rabbit all by hissel', is jest 'bout de biggest one I ebber -sot my two eyes on. Dar, he ain't lef' noffin' but de bones." - -"When you no have more meat," said the chief, coming over and standing -before Sam, while he cast a covetous look at Maj, "then I tell you what -you do." - -"What?" asked Sam. - -"Don't you like the dog?" - -"Oh, yes," said Sam, thinking that the Indian who could like dumb -creatures must have a kindly heart. "I am very fond of the dog." - -"Then why you no eat him?" asked Blanco. - -As Sam had never looked at Maj as something that might be eaten instead -of being fed, he was not a little puzzled what to reply, still he -managed to say, with an attempt at smiling: - -"That isn't the way I like the dog." - -"No," said Ike in a low voice, "we likes dog wid de ha'r on an' de bark -in him." - -All unmindful of this discussion Maj went on eating the bones that had -been thrown to him and looking as if he had room for a great many more -than were in sight. - -After this very informal meal was over the chief gave an order to his -own people and then told Sam that he and his friends must follow him. - -"Where to?" asked Sam. - -"We see, me don't know," was the surly reply. - -As there was no food left, Sam rolled up the blankets and throwing these -and the saddle-bags containing the gold dust and the precious paper over -his shoulder, started up the ravine. - -Ike and Wah Shin followed, the former clinging to his old shot-gun as if -his life depended on it. - -Eight lithe Indians, none of them burdened with clothes or the world's -goods, brought up the rear. - -On reaching the uplands the chief came to a halt, the others doing the -same, and shading his eyes from the sun, he looked long and eagerly to -the eastward. - -With a thrill of joy Sam saw that neither Ulna nor his pursuers were in -sight, and well knowing the young Ute's powers as a runner, he had now -no fears of his being overtaken. - -As if he understood what was passing in the white youth's mind, the -chief said: - -"You know Ulna long time?" - -"Only a few months." - -"You like him heap?" - -"I do." - -"You make him free?" - -"I am glad I did," said Sam, boldly. - -"Then you take his place like same as he was here," said Blanco, with an -angry glint in his eyes. - -"I do not understand." - -"If Ulna stay we kill him." - -"Yes," said Sam, feeling a cold chill and wondering what was coming -next. - -"But Ulna get away." - -"Yes." - -"You help him." - -"I did." - -"Then you take Ulna's place. You all same like Ulna to us. We take you -to Apaches, way off," and the chief waved his hands to the south where -the purple peaks of the San Francisco range could be seen rising into -the bluest of blue skies. - -"Would you kill a man because he loved his friend?" asked Sam with a -calmness of manner that did not at all indicate his feelings. - -"When man's friend my foe--yes." - -"But Ulna would not do that." - -"You think so." - -"I am sure he would not." - -"Ha! you don't know Ute." - -"I know Ulna," persisted Sam. - -"Ulna he like take my scalp." - -"I am sure he would not hurt you unless it was to save his own life. The -whites have taught him better." - -"The whites!" repeated the chief, with a grunt of contempt. "Oh, yes, -the whites, heap fine the whites. They take all Apaches' land, kill his -wife, kill him when he don't like it. Apache don't go to white man's -land; why, then, he comes here we no send for him?" - -Sam saw that this was a mixed question to which the answer could not be -truthfully given unless it agreed with the Indian's notion of right, -still he said evasively: - -"All men do wrong at times, but all men should try to do right." - -"What is right? what is wrong? White man think one thing, Apache think -another thing; no one know. Sit down on stone; I wait till braves come -back with Ulna's scalp, then all leave." - -Without waiting for any comment, Blanco again snapped the fingers of -both hands above his head, and turned away to show he did not care to -discuss the subject further. - -This conversation took place near the point of rocks in which Sam and -his friends had spent the previous night. - -On some of the outlying stones Ike and Wah Shin were seated, eagerly -watching the chief, while their faces showed that they were taking -anything but a hopeful view of the situation. - -"Mistah Sam, w'at you t'ink 'bout dis time?" asked Ike as he placed a -blanket for his young master to sit on. - -"I hardly know what to think, Ike," was the reply. - -"Don't you t'ink we made a mistake?" - -"In what way, Ike?" - -"By comin' up out ob dat canyon." - -"Would you want to stay there forever?" - -"Wa'al, not adzackly; but if I had any choosin 'bout it I'd a heap sight -rudder be dar dan heah. I neber did hab no use for a Injun nohow. Jest -only tink, dey's been a-watchin' an' a-watchin' Maj, an' a-lickin' ob -dar lips as if dey was feelin' how he tasted. But if dey gits away wid -dat dog den dey'll hab to steal him whin dis yar chile's asleep," said -Ike, and he reached out and pulled the dog nearer to him by means of a -rope he had fastened about his neck. - -"Dogee, he no so belly bad fol to make eat. Way off Chinaland fat dogee -allee same's nice lilly tulkey. Big man he like him muchee heap." - -"Wa'al," said Ike, with ludicrous contempt, "I tanks de Great Mastah I -ain't a Injun or a Chinee. Dar's only two decent kind ob people; one's -black, like me, de odder's w'ite like Mistah Sam. But," he added, with a -sigh, "I don't go foh to blame no one jest kase dey's so unfortnit as -not to be ob de right culah." - -Sam could not keep his mind on the very funny discussion which followed -between Ike and Wah Shin, as to the merits of their respective races. He -was thinking of his beloved father, and wondering if he still lived and -was waiting for the paper that was to prove his innocence, by showing to -the world that he could have had no possible motive for desiring the -death of Tom Edwards. - -One, two, three hours passed and the fierce sun poured down a blistering -heat on the bare rocks, till the hot air rose in shivering, shimmering -waves, that distorted every object seen at any distance, and threw into -the most fantastic shapes the hills that studded the wide plateau. - -Every few minutes Sam looked to the east, expecting the return of the -braves who had gone in pursuit of Ulna, but it was not till the sun had -been past the zenith more than an hour, that his keen gaze detected four -figures--the mirage gave them the appearance of giant -spectres--approaching at a deliberate pace. - -Blanco made the discovery about the same time, and at once sent a -messenger to hurry up the pursuers. He did not need to be told that his -braves had not been successful in their mission, for had they been -returning with a scalp they would not have been so deliberate in their -movements. - -When the braves were within a few hundred yards, Blanco ran out to meet -them, and seeing that one of them was wounded he said: - -"Did the Ute win?" - -"He did," replied the wounded man. "An antelope could not have kept up -with him had he put forth all his speed." - -"Yet, you came close enough to him to catch his bullet," said the -puzzled chief. - -"Yes, and close enough to lose my scalp, if Ulna had cared to take it," -said the brave, with a candor but rarely manifested by a savage. - -In answer to the chief's desire to learn how this unusual event came -about, the brave told frankly and truthfully the whole story, even to -the conversation he had with Ulna before he left. - -This story evidently had a powerful effect on Blanco, for he stroked his -forehead for some minutes, and then said: - -"The Utes are changing; the Apaches must change too. I will not harm the -young white man who told me the truth." - -Turning, the chief strode quickly to the place where Sam was sitting and -eagerly watching, and then extending his hand, he said with some feeling -in his voice: - -"You no tell lie. Ulna is good. Ulna escape. I am glad in my heart, for -he no take life one of my braves when he can." - -Sam could hardly credit his ears, but there was no mistaking the -expression on the swarthy face, despite its half-covering of war paint, -so he shook the chief's hand and said with a great sense of relief: - -"I told you the truth about Ulna, I tell you the truth about myself. Now -guide me to Hurley's Gulch and I will pay you all I promised." - -For reasons which he did not state, the chief said he could not go to -Hurley's Gulch, but he was willing to guide Sam part of the way there, -and to take all the rifles and other weapons they had with them as part -payment, the other things promised to be sent out to a certain point two -days after the party reached the Gulch. - -These were certainly anything but generous terms, but as Sam was in no -humor to press a close bargain, he agreed to them at once. - -There was not much preparation to be made. All the canteens were filled -with water, and about the middle of the afternoon they began the march -for Hurley's Gulch, which the chief said could be reached the next -afternoon, though he would leave them in the morning. - -With a lighter heart than he had carried for many a day, Sam, with Ike, -Wah Shin, and the dog following him in the order named, started off by -the side of the chief. - -They moved so fast that by dark, when they went into camp in the bottom -of a gulch where there was water, they had traveled at least twenty -miles. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXII.--IN GREATER PERIL STILL. - - -With the first glimmer of day the following morning all were awake, and -a very light breakfast was made of the root bread, which the chief -distributed with great fairness as far as it went. - -As Sam had agreed, he turned over to the chief the rifles, pistols, -knives and blankets belonging to his party, keeping back only the -canteens, which had been filled with water, and the saddle-bags. - -"I should like to borrow my own rifle from you," said Sam, after he had -made the transfer, "for it is not safe to travel through this land -without a weapon to defend one's self from foe or wild beasts. I shall -return it when I send you the other things." - -"I let you have dis gun," said the chief, pointing to the old rusty -shot-gun that had been the special object of Ike's care and the delight -of his heart for so long. - -"Take her, Mistah Sam, take her," urged Ike. "Dar ain't anodder gun like -her--no, not in all dis yar land." - -This was certainly the truth, yet "she" was rather an unreliable weapon -to depend on in a trying emergency. - -"That is a shot-gun, no good to you or to me. Let me have my own rifle -with some ammunition, and I pledge my life to send it back and six more -equally good with it." - -"I tell you what I do," said the chief, after some deliberation and a -good deal of whispering with his own people. - -"What?" - -"You got dog?" - -"Yes." - -"Well, you give me dog, I give you rifle." - -Sam had always been attached to Maj, and the adventures they had shared -together made him even dearer, so that to lose him would be like parting -with a friend; still, he knew that a sacrifice might have to be made. - -"What do you want with the dog?" he asked. - -"Eat him," grunted the chief. - -"I will give you the dog if you pledge me your word that you will not -kill him for three days," said Sam, stooping and patting Maj on the -head, while the faithful creature, in its turn, licked his hand. - -"But we no find game then we get hungry," said the chief. - -"You can find game. Agree to this, for the dog is my friend," said Sam -with much feeling. - -"An' my frien', too," added Ike. - -"All right; I no kill for three days," said the chief. - -With this understanding Sam received his rifle and the belt containing -his ammunition, and one of the Apaches fastened a cord about the dog's -neck and dragged the reluctant creature to his own side. - -The chief pointed to a distant elevation--it looked to be only a few -miles away, though it was actually thirty or more--and said: - -"That mountain back Hurley's Gulch. Go there. Keep north side. You find -'em before dark. I come here three days. You bring all things, rifles, -pistols, knives, and--and one more thing." - -"What is that?" asked Sam. - -"Heap tobacco, much lot whisky." - -"I will keep my promise," said Sam, who could not but feel that the -Indian was decidedly "on the make." - -With this understanding Sam and his friends parted from the Apaches, and -with their eager eyes fixed on the mountain that marked the site of -Hurley's Gulch they hurried on. - -The thought that he should meet his father that night gave strength and -elasticity to Sam's limbs and filled his heart with a hope that was -thrilling in its ecstacy. - -He felt that their troubles were near an end, and that before the sun -went down his father's innocence would be established, and the little -band of Gold Cave Campers would be happily together once more. - -He walked with such a long, quick stride that Ike and Wah Shin could -only keep up with him by breaking into a dog-trot, that made them puff -with the exertion. - -"See h'ar, Mistah Sam!" called out Ike, after they had been traveling -for two hours and the heat waves began to distort the landscape again. -"Does yeh expeck a feller foh to run like a race-horse, w'en he ain't -got nothin' in his inside but a bit ob dem dar roots? Foh de Lor', if -you keeps up dis yar like all day, you'll fine yerself alone, foh dis -chile's so holler he's nigh done gin out," and Sam came to a halt and -wiped his perspiring face with his ragged coat-sleeve. - -"Me hungly allee same like Ike, but me no say any-tlings," said Wah Shin -as he stood panting like a hunted hare. - -"I know, boys, that I've been hurrying more than I should in justice to -you, but the thought that every step is taking me nearer to my father -makes me forget how weary you must be," said Sam, his own brown face -showing how the terrible pace told on him. - -"Mistah Sam, dar's a sight more reason w'y you should be tireder an' -hungrier dan we," said Ike, the better part of his nature asserting -itself, as it always did in an emergency. "But we'll git dar long afore -dark widout so much hurryin', an' yer fadder'll be a heap sight more -pleased if we all shows up fresh an' smilin', eben if we is so holler." - -Sam slackened his pace, but he was making fully four miles an hour when -under way again. - -The water in their canteens became very warm in the blistering heat of -that dry atmosphere, but they had to drink, and as a consequence their -supply was exhausted by the middle of the afternoon. - -They had no food with them, and all were very hungry, but the prospect -ahead made them forget their sufferings; for soldiers do not feel the -pain of wounds received in the excitement of battle. - -Sam reasoned that two hours more would see them at Hurley's Gulch, and -had so told his companions, when Ike called out: - -"Hello! Wat on earf is dem?" - -Sam turned in the direction pointed out by Ike, and to his amazement he -saw the forms of four gigantic horsemen; but, instead of their riding -along the solid earth, they appeared to be moving far up in the sky. - -All were familiar enough with the phenomena of this land to know that -the riders were on the ground and that the spectral figures, -representing them in the heavens had their origin in the mirage which is -so frequent and delusive in this land. - -"Ulna has reached Hurley's Gulch, and those must be men who have come to -search for us," said Sam after he had surveyed the figures for some -seconds. - -About the same time the horsemen must have discovered Sam and his -friends, for the giant figures could be seen pointing and waving their -arms, while the monstrous horses plunged across the sky with mighty -bounds. - -Again Sam hurried on till he came to a towering rock that commanded from -its summit a view of the country round about. - -Up this he clambered, Ike and Wah Shin following him with great -activity. - -On the summit of the rock there were a series of excavations, some of -which were partly filled with water left there by the late storm. - -This water was comparatively cool, and after drinking till satisfied, -Sam looked in the direction from which he expected the riders. - -To his surprise, they were only a few hundred yards away, and it did not -need a second glance to convince him that one of these riders was Frank -Shirley, and another was the man with one eye who had accompanied him on -that day, that seemed so far away, to Gold Cave Camp. - -"Surely," he reasoned, "these would not be the men my father would send -out from Hurley's Gulch to find me." - -Instinctively he felt that the presence of these men meant him no good, -and he made up his mind not to place himself in their power till assured -that they were friendly. - -The two horsemen with Frank Shirley and Badger were the landlord of the -hotel at Hurley's, and a wretched creature of the same stripe who had -been a partner and friend of Tom Edwards. - -"Halloo! Halloo, Sam Willett! We've come out to find you!" called out -Shirley when he came within hearing distance. - -"Who sent you?" was Sam's salutation. - -"Your father." - -"How did he know I was here?" - -"Ulna told him." - -"Then why didn't he or Hank Tims come?" - -"There are good reasons why they could not get off, so we have come in -their stead. Get down from the rocks; we've been searching for you since -before daylight," said Shirley, as he and Badger dismounted from their -horses not a hundred feet away. - -Slipping into one of the excavations so that he could see what was going -on below without exposing himself, Sam called down: - -"Frank Shirley, my father never sent you to find me." - -"What! do you think Mr. Shirley's a-lyin'?" shouted Badger, at the same -time unstringing his rifle and assuming a position as if about to fire. - -"Yes, I do," said Sam boldly. - -Badger would have fired, though Sam was out of sight had not Shirley -laid his hand on his arm and said pleadingly: - -"Don't do that, Badger; you'll spill all the fat in the fire. That young -fellow has a rifle, and he knows how to use it." - -Sam heard all this distinctly and he called out: - -"Yes, and I will use it if you fellows don't get back and mount your -horses while I count ten. One, two, three, four----" - -Neither Shirley nor Badger waited to hear more, for as "one" was called -out they saw the muzzle of a rifle pointing down at them from the top of -the rock. - -With the alacrity of acrobats the two men scrambled into their saddles, -and as they did so the word "Two!" rang out. - -"There, you see, we want to humor you, and if we were not friends we -shouldn't do that," said Frank Shirley, trembling in voice and frame -from his recent effort. - -Sam's reply showed that he had no faith in this. - -"My rifle is good for a half-mile. If you are within reach in ten -minutes I'll begin to fire." - -"See h'ar, young feller," called out Badger, "do you know what I think -of you?" - -"No, and I don't care." - -"I think you're a devil." - -"All right. Start, for the ten minutes have begun." - -The four men did start. It would have been nothing less than suicide, -the landlord said, to remain there and be shot at, "more particlar whin -there was no show to shoot back." - -Sullenly the men rode off, and when they had gone out of rifle-reach -they came to a halt, and after much swearing all round, Shirley asked: - -"Well, gentlemen, what's to be done next?" - -"Nothing, till dark," said Badger. - -"And what then?" - -"Then we ken get at 'em." - -"But how?" - -"While two of us shoot at the front of the rock to attract 'em, two -others can climb up behind and finish the job for good," said Badger. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIII.--IN A TRAP. - - -From his lookout Sam kept a constant watch on the four horsemen, and he -made up his mind from their movements that they were not going back -without letting him hear from them again. - -"W'at you tink now, 'bout dis time?" asked Ike, who, with Wah Shin, had -crept up from one of the excavations to Sam's side. - -"I think, Ike, that those men are not our friends," said Sam, pointing -to the distant group. - -"Dat's jest how I feel. De worl' wouldn't be no wuss off if de earf was -to open up an' swaller all dem men an' den come shut agin, like a -rat-trap, Mistah Sam! Do you know what I tinks?" - -"What is it, Ike?" - -"W'en we wuz down in dem canyons, wif de watah all round us an' dem dar -big rocks shootin' away up till dey 'peahed to go right frue de sky, den -we tinked we wuz in a pooty bad fix, didn't we?" - -"So we did, Ike." - -"An' den again, w'en we fell in wif dem savage Injuns an' it appeahed as -ef dey was bound to hab our skelps, den we tinked as how we wuz in a -heap sight wuss fix'n eber?" - -"Yes, Ike." - -"An' we kinder wished we wuz back in de canyons?" - -"That is true." - -"Wa'al, does yeh know w'at I tinks now?" - -"What is it, Ike?" - -"Dat a mean w'ite man is a heap sight meaner dan a mean Injun----" - -"My opinion exactly." - -"An' dat if I had my choice to be in de comp'ny ob dem four men off dar, -or away back wif dem bar-legged 'Paches, as is so powahful fond ob dorg, -w'y, I'd go wif de 'Patches ebery time, an' feel might tankful foh de -hobertunity." - -"I agree with you, Ike." - -"But w'at's to be did?" - -"We must wait." - -"An' starve?" - -"We can't get anything to eat here, Ike." - -"If we could get suffin' to eat de place'd be a sight pleasanter. I -nebber could feel brave w'en I was feelin' holler at de same time," and -Ike tightened his belt, and rapped himself on the outside to show he was -very much in the condition of a drum. - -"Bime by, light way soon we hab night, sun go down, see," said Wah Shin, -pointing to the west where a crimson flush marked the spot where the sun -had set. - -With great anxiety Sam saw the shadows settling over the landscape. - -He was now convinced that these men came to do him a harm, and he -resolved not to let them come near him while he had a shot left in his -rifle, or he was able to pull a trigger. - -He felt this delay more keenly than he had all the obstacles that beset -his course since he left Gold Cave Camp to reach his father. - -By a perilous and round about way he had come, and when within a few -miles of the objective point for which he had struggled so bravely, he -found himself stopped by men, who, according to all the laws of -humanity, should have been his protectors and friends. - -It was much like a brave swimmer's sinking within touch of shore, or a -starving man's hand falling helpless by his side when just within reach -of food. - -But Sam Willett had the courage and the devotion that obstacles could -not weaken nor sufferings ever change. - -With every trial he grew stronger, more determined to reach the father, -who was nearly always in his thoughts, and never for an instant absent -from his heart. - -To add to the trials of the situation night was coming, and under its -cover Sam was now convinced that these men would try to make their way -to the top of the rock on which he and his faithful companions had found -a refuge. - -"I've heerd tell o' war," groaned Ike, "an' I've seed men as fit an' -fout, but thar wasn't none of 'em as eber got cornered as we is now. If -I wasn't so awful holler I'd kneel down and pray, for if de good Lor' -wants to help us He'll neber hab a bettah chance." - -"Don't lose heart, Ike. Help will come in good time," said Sam, with a -cheeriness of manner that did not at all indicate his actual feelings. - -"I no cannee see how help him can gettee to us, but I no cale. Only can -die one time," said Wah Shin, with the stolidity of bearing and that -indifference to death which so often distinguishes the Mongolian. - -"These men," said Sam, pointing in the direction of the enemy, "knew we -were out here before they left Hurley's Gulch." - -"It do seem bery much dat way," said Ike, with a sad shake of the head. -Then he added: "But I don't see how dey could hab knowed." - -"Can't you think of one way, Ike?" - -"No, Mistah Sam; foh de life ob me I can't." - -"Have you forgotten Ulna?" - -"Ulna!" exclaimed Ike. - -"Yes; there is no doubt in my mind as to his safety. He has reached -Hurley's Gulch, and those men, my father's enemies, have come out, on -the strength of Ulna's information, to stop us." - -"But why don't some ob our friends show up? Dat's w'at gits me," said -Ike, and he rubbed his head vigorously with both hands, as if he might -in this way excite his brain into better action. - -The question asked by Ike had presented itself to Sam before, but as he -could not answer it he did not let it annoy him. Speculation and action -do not work in harmony. - -While it was yet sufficiently light, Sam Willett, like a careful soldier -examining the field on which a life and death struggle is about to take -place, looked over the rock on which they had found refuge and saw its -weak points as well as its advantages. - -He walked boldly about within sight of the enemy, and the wonder is that -they did not risk a shot at him. They certainly would have done so had -they not agreed to try the effect of strategy before attempting force. - -It did not take Sam long to discover that the summit of the rock was -accessible on one side only, and so he very wisely reasoned that that -was the only side to be defended in the event of a night attack. - -He reasoned further that a rock so conspicuous in the landscape and -known to have water on its top must be well known to every one -acquainted with that land. Indeed, there was evidence all about him that -the place had been frequently visited and used as a camping-ground by -Indians and miners, and the chances were that Frank Shirley's companions -knew the way to the top. - -Ike and Wah Shin were without arms, but it did not take Sam long to -discover how their strength and courage could be utilized in defending -the position. - -Scattered over the crest of the rock there were a great many irregular -pieces of yellow sandstone, weighing from a few ounces to fifty pounds, -or more, and, properly handled these stones would make very effective -ammunition. - -People whose hands and brains are occupied do not feel trouble like -those who have nothing to do but to think over their woes. - -The instant Sam stated his purpose to Ike and Wah Shin, their faces -brightened and they went to work with a spirit and energy that made them -forget, for the time, that they were very hungry. - -They piled the stones four feet high across the narrow turn, up which -their assailants must come, and in addition they placed a great heap -within reach to be used as ammunition. - -By the time these preparations were made, it was quite dark, but the -snorting and tramping of uneasy horses and the hoarse voices of men in -the distance, told Sam that the enemy were still close by. - -"Mistah Sam," whispered Ike, unable longer to stand the strain in -silence. - -"Yes, Ike." - -"How does yeh feel 'bout dis time?" - -"All right--considering." - -"Not so hungry as yeh was, eh?" - -"No." - -"Dat's same's me. My heart's beatin' so dat I don't feel so holler----" - -"You heap skee-at," grunted Wah Shin. - -"Yes, an' I ain't 'shamed to say I is; but if it comes to chuckin' down -rocks, you'll see I ken work harder'n you, Wah Shin," said Ike, with -spirit. - -"Mebbe yes. Mebbe no. Me chuckee rocks w'en Meest Sam he say, 'You go -in, Wah.' Me no blag." - -"Hist!" interrupted Sam. "Keep silence. They are coming nearer." - -On the instant Ike and Wah Shin became as silent as the grave, and -hugged closer to the surface of the rock, but they could hear their own -hearts beating like war-drums, and they would not have been at all -surprised if told that the men down below could hear them, too. - -It was a trying moment, but Sam was equal to the occasion. His ready -rifle was protruding through an opening in the wall that commanded the -approach. Ike stood at his right hand and Wah Shin on his left, each -ready to hurl down the stones on their assailants, when their young -commander gave the word. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXIV.--A BRIEF TRUCE AND WHAT FOLLOWED IT. - - -After a painful wait, Sam heard voices under the rock, and he braced -himself for the expected assault. - -The men were evidently consulting, and one was in favor of attacking at -once, while the others advised "strategy;" this was the one word that -came distinctly to Sam's ears. - -At length, Shirley, who was in favor of strategy, stepped back from -under the rock and called up: - -"Hello! hello! up there!" - -"Hello, down there!" was Sam's response. - -"Is that you, Sam Willett?" - -"It is." - -"I want to talk with you." - -"Talk away, I am listening." - -"Do you know me?" - -"No, I don't, and what's more I don't want to," said Sam, with a ring of -firmness in his voice that surprised and angered his questioner. - -"I am your friend, your cousin," said Shirley. - -"You are Frank Shirley?" - -"Yes." - -"Late of Detroit?" - -"Yes, Sam, that's me." - -"Well, Frank Shirley, late of Detroit, you may be my cousin, but you are -not my friend." - -"But why shouldn't I be?" - -"Because you are not a gentleman." - -"That young feller up there," said Badger, with an oath, "ought to be -tarred and feathered and then set on fire and shot at. And if I ever get -my hands on him, I'll----" - -"Don't," interrupted the landlord, "you'll kick all the fat into the -fire. Let Mr. Shirley talk to the boy; he'll get in fine work, if you -only keep your mouth shut." - -Badger gave vent to his feelings by a series of savage growls, and -Shirley, after much coughing to ease his nervousness, proceeded to carry -out his strategy. - -"See here, Sam Willett!" - -"Go on, I hear," was the response. - -"I don't mean you any harm." - -"And you sha'n't do me any, if I can help it," said Sam. - -"If you look away off to the east, you can see lights." - -"I know that." - -"Do you know where those lights are?" - -"I think I do." - -"Where?" - -"At Hurley's Gulch." - -"Your father is there----" - -"I am glad to hear it." - -"And he is very sick." - -"How do you know?" - -"Because I saw him in a bad fix to-day." - -"See here, Shirley, tell me at once what you want," said Sam, in his -spirited way. - -"I want to take you to your father; he's been heart-broken, thinking you -were dead; so come down, and I pledge you my honor as a gentleman that I -will take you to Hurley's Gulch," said Shirley, in accents intended to -be reassuring and soothing. - -"Your honor as a gentleman?" repeated Sam with a ring of sarcasm. - -"Yes, that's what I said." - -"And we'll let you three young fellers ride our horses," added the -landlord. - -"And you will also pledge your honor, as a gentleman, to do that?" said -Sam. - -"Oh, I'll swear to it," said the landlord. - -"Thanks, but the security being false and worthless, I must decline your -offer," said Sam, surprised at his own coolness and his ready command of -language. - -"Then you won't come down?" from Shirley. - -"Thanks, not to-night." - -"Sam Willett!" - -"Yes; Frank Shirley!" - -"Are you crazy?" - -"No, I'm mad; and you'll find I'm dangerous if you bother me further," -said Sam stoutly. - -"See har, young feller," shouted Badger. "If you don't want us to save -you, do you know what we'll do next?" - -"I don't." - -"Why, we'll get mad, too----" - -"I don't care." - -"And," continued Badger, his voice choking with anger, "we'll go up thar -and fotch you down; and if so be you git hurt, it'll be yer own fault." - -"Hurt?" from Sam. - -"Yes, and hurted purty bad, too." - -"What's your name?" - -"My name's Badger. I'm a terror, I am. I was nussed on blizzards, and -rocked by tornadoes. I live on rattlesnakes and horned toads, and when -I'm riled its wuss nor a earthquake. Now you are gettin' my dander riz, -so come down, for if I have to climb up after you, you'll git hurt." - -Badger certainly thought that this fierce speech would have a most -depressing effect upon the youth in command of the rock, great therefore -was his anger and disappointment when he received this reply. - -"Before I am hurt some one else will be in the same fix, for I and my -companions propose to defend ourselves." - -"But why defend yourselves," said Shirley, "when we mean you nothing but -good." - -"I do not care to give my reasons; but I'll tell you what I've been -thinking ever since I started to reach Hurley's Gulch." - -"What's that?" - -"That you and the one-eyed ruffian who travels with you are the cause of -all my father's troubles----" - -"That's a lie!" roared Badger. - -Sam continued as if he had not heard the interruption. - -"And I believe it was you two who killed that wretch, Tom Edwards, in -order to get us into a scrape--yes, to get us out of the way. Now get -back, or come on, just as you please." - -Sam said this in a way that convinced the man below that his resolution -could not be shaken, and that any attempt to oust him from his -stronghold by force would be met with resistance to the death. - -"That young devil up thar's a chip of the old block," hissed Badger. -"Why, cuss him, he talks jist like his father. Do you know what my -opinion of them two is, Mr. Shirley?" - -"What?" - -"That they're the hardest, toughest cases I've met up with in my -five-and-forty years of mixin' among all classes. Sich people hadn't -ought to be let live among decent folks." - -"I've seed boys in my time, hundreds and thousands of 'em," said the -disgusted landlord, "but that young feller up on top of that rock, for -downright gall and bitterness, and bull-headedness, lays over anything I -ever saw, heard or red of." - -"It is evident to me that Sam Willett will fight; now what are we to -do?" asked Shirley in despair, for all prospect of succeeding by -"strategy" was gone. - -"We must carry out my plan," said Badger. - -"What's that?" - -"We've got to go back to first principles, jist as I supposed we would -when you got talkin' 'bout mildness and strategy----" - -"Explain yourself, Badger." - -"You and me must face the music, Mr. Shirley." - -"Face the music?" stammered Shirley. - -"Yes, thar's nothin' else to be did." - -"Explain yourself, Badger." - -"You and me must creep up the rock on the other side, while Jake and Ned -stand off to the east and keep up a fire on the top, so as to distract -attention from the p'int we're after. Do you see?" - -Shirley said he saw very clearly; but from his manner it was very -evident he did not look with approval on this plan of assault. - -Physically and morally Frank Shirley was a coward, and though he tried -to hide this fact from others, he could not hide it from himself. - -But even cowards will fight desperately for their lives, and all -Shirley's future, if not his very existence, depended on the success of -this monstrous undertaking. - -If he failed, then he was an impoverished outcast with the stain of -murder on his soul, though all the chances were that if Sam Willett was -permitted to reach Hurley's Gulch, the vigilantes would arrest himself -and Badger for the death of Tom Edwards. - -Quickly he looked over the situation, and his cowardly heart took on a -show of courage; it was the courage of desperation, as he realized how -much depended on his conduct this night. - -"I can't say that I'm much of a fighter, having had no experience that -way," said Shirley with a tremor in his voice. "But, Badger, if you lead -the way, I'll follow to the end. We must finish this job to-night." - -"If we don't it'll finish us," said Badger grimly. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXV.--A NIGHT BATTLE. - - -Sam was astonished when he heard the rifles banging away on the east -side of the rock. - -He had been looking for a direct attack and so could not understand this -move. - -"What can they mean; they are certainly bad, but they are not such -downright fools as to think they can do us any harm from that quarter," -said Sam, thinking aloud rather than asking for the opinion of his -companions. - -"Mistah Sam." - -"Yes, Ike." - -"I ken hear de bullets a whistlin' ober head, an' it do 'peah ez ef dey -was comin' lower down." - -"W'at mattle if dey no comee low nuff down to hult? Let 'em singee, -lat's alle lite," grunted Wah Shin, as he crouched closer to the rock, -and hugged to his breast a big stone, which he intended to use to the -best advantage when the proper time came. - -Sam Willett was by instinct a soldier. - -This useless attack had a purpose in it, and he was not long in reaching -a right conclusion. - -To encourage Ike and Wah Shin, he gave them the benefit of his -reasoning. - -"That firing, off there, is all a dodge," he said. - -"Tink dey're shootin' foh fun, Mistah Sam?" - -"No, Ike, they are in dead earnest, but their object is to take our -attention away from the point of danger." - -"De odder side." - -"Yes; the attack will be made along the trail leading from the ground to -the top of the rock, and we must be prepared for it," said Sam. - -Nothing could be gained by heeding the riflemen. - -All his sight and strength must now be used to watch and guard the only -ascent by which their position could be reached without the highest -scaling ladders, and of such mechanical appliances there was no danger. - -Sam placed Ike and Wah Shin in position again, and whispered to them not -to hurl a stone till he gave the word. - -This done he brought his rifle to a half cock, and making sure that his -cartridges were within reach, he knelt down with the muzzle of his gun -covering the trail. - -The dry, still air carried every sound. - -Though Badger and Shirley moved with the stealth of Indians, yet their -labored breathing, and, now and then, the fall of their feet came to -Sam's ears. - -He was sure he could hear two men whispering under the rocks. He took a -firmer hold of his rifle and tried to look through the intense darkness -that covered the route by which the attack must be made. - -The strain of that long wait was more trying to strength and courage -than would have been a prompt attack. - -Five, ten, fifteen minutes passed, and still the riflemen to the east -kept up their desultory, but harmless firing. - -The darkness that added to the difficulties of the defense, was not a -great advantage to the attacking party. - -Badger was in the advance, groping with his hands for the trail, and not -daring to strike a light, for fear of making it the target for Sam. - -"Keep close behind," whispered Badger to Shirley, who, as they crept on, -showed a decided disposition to lag to the rear. - -"Have you found the trail, Badger?" - -"I think so." - -"Is it steep?" - -"Hist, man, don't talk, but foller close up. Here's the place where we -begin to climb. Mind, it's no fool of a job to get to the top at the -best of times," said Badger, as he began the ascent on hands and knees. - -Shirley, trembling in every limb, came close after, his fears somewhat -allayed by the comforting thought that Badger's huge form would shield -him from any bullets that might be fired down. - -Sam was on the alert. The sounds about the place died out, and the -stillness added to the painful intensity of the situation. - -Unable longer to control his feelings, Ike bent down and whispered: - -"Say, Mistah Sam." - -"What is it, Ike?" - -"Dis yar's gittin' ticklish." - -"Yes; be still." - -Unmindful of this injunction, Ike continued: - -"Somet'ing got to be did mighty soon, or dis chile can't stan' de -strain." - -"Wait." - -"But it's time to heab de rocks." - -"Not till I give the word." - -"But as I'm a sinner I can heah 'em!" - -"Where?" - -"Right close by----" - -Ike's sentence, was cut short by the flash and crack of a pistol fired -by a man not twenty feet away. - -With a "spat" the bullet splintered against the rocks a few feet above -Sam's head. - -The time for immediate action had come. - -"Now, boys!" shouted Sam, in ringing tones. - -By the flash of his own rifle he saw the forms of two men on the trail -outside the wall he had thrown up. - -With the strength of desperation, Ike and Wah Shin rose to their feet -and began hurling stones into the path, while Sam fired as rapidly as he -could throw shells into the breech of his rifle. - -In less time than it takes to record the act, the defenders knew that -the assault had been a failure. - -Oaths, groans and the crashing of bodies, two score feet below, told -that Badger and Shirley did not retreat of their own volition, but in -accordance with the one law which they could not violate, viz.: -gravitation. - -Cries for help went up from the base of the rock, and the two men who -had been indulging in harmless rifle practice hastened to the relief of -their less fortunate companions. - -"Hello, boys, any one hurt?" asked one. - -"Hurt!" groaned Badger. "They've done for me." - -"Oh, I guess not. Let us get a light and see how things is," said the -landlord. - -"Don't make a light," protested Shirley. - -"Why not?" - -"Because they'll fire at it." - -"No, but go up and clean them fellows out. I could die happy if I knowed -you'd cleaned 'em out," gasped Badger. - -"Wa'al," said the landlord, "you can't expect me to go up there and try -to do anything after the fist you two have made of it. I don't mind -anything in reason, but that's axin' a leetle too much." - -"Something must be done, and at once," said Frank Shirley. - -"What do you want done?" asked the landlord, already heartily sick of -the undertaking. - -"I am hurt as well as Badger." - -"Sorry for that." - -"And you two must help us on our horses and get us away from here." - -"Of course we'll stick by you," said the landlord. "But atween you and -me and the rock, Mr. Shirley, I kinder think, perhaps, it mout be -better, if so be you steered cl'ar of Hurley's Gulch for awhile----" - -The man stopped suddenly, his attention being attracted by the barking -of a dog in the distance. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVI.--TO THE RESCUE. - - -Badger and Shirley were carried from under the rock, but when it came to -lifting them on the horses it was found that they were too much injured -to ride. - -"Thar ain't no use in my tryin' it," groaned Badger. "I can't sit in the -saddle." - -"Then what's to be did?" asked the landlord. - -"Hide me away, and when daylight comes send some of the boys after me -with a stretcher." - -"That'd never do," protested the landlord. - -"Why not?" - -"Coz, if you was to git back to the Gulch at this time all the chances -is they'd make you stretch hemp. Fact is, ole feller, you and Shirley -here has played your last keerds, and I'm downright sorry to say the -game has gone agin you in a most surprisin' bad way." - -"Don't leave me!" whined Shirley. "Take care of me and I'll pay you your -own price." - -"Oh, that's all right," said the landlord, who, with his companion, had -placed the two men side by side on their saddle blankets and left with -them two canteens. "But the barkin' of that dog comes nearer and nearer, -and I don't like it. Keep a stiff upper lip and I'll send out and see -how you are after sun-up." - -With this promise the landlord and his companion, with an eye single to -their own safety, mounted their horses and rode away. - -The barking of the dog, coming from the west, was also heard by Sam and -his friends. - -"I tink dlat no dogee. Dlat a wolf," said Wah Shin. - -"Wolf!" repeated Ike with fine scorn. "That's no wolf. Heah him! Jist -lissen, Mistah Sam! Ain't dat music, an' can't yeh make it out?" - -"I hear it, Ike," said Sam, "and the animal is evidently running fast -and coming this way." - -"It's Maj! It's deah ole Maj!" shouted Ike, and in his excitement he -dashed against the wall, and with a roar like Niagara the rocks went -thundering down the trail. - -Sam heard the two horsemen galloping away, but as he could not tell -whether they were retreating or going after reinforcements he determined -not to abate his vigilance so long as there was a sign of danger. - -Again he heard something clambering up the rocks, and he was on the -point of firing, when a short, joyous bark rang out, and the next -instant Maj was in their midst. - -The faithful creature was nearly exhausted by his long run, for he had -escaped from the Apaches, but he had strength enough left to show his -joy at the meeting. - -He leaped at Sam, and after licking his face and hands he turned and, -with commendable impartiality, bestowed the same attention on the -others. - -Ike actually cried for joy, and he made an effort to take the dog in his -arms, but when the first greetings were over Maj, half dead with hunger -and thirst, discovered that there was water near by, and without any -thought of the propriety of his conduct he plunged in and lapped till -his parched skin was full. - -"Oh, if Ulna was only heah now," cried Ike, "we'd be all togedder agin -an' as happy as a--as a darkey in ripe watah millyon time!" - -Sam was confident that Ulna had reached Hurley's Gulch, and this thought -gave him so much comfort that he did not wonder why his friend had not -come to his relief, for he well knew that the Indian youth would do -everything that lay in his power, and he was right in this surmise. - -The coming of Ulna had not only saved the lives of two men, but it had -also caused a revolution in the minds of a majority of the people living -at Hurley's Gulch. - -To be sure, there were some who did not believe the Indian youth, and -who were satisfied in their own minds that Mr. Willett and Hank Tims -should be hanged, and that they would be, sooner or later; but these -fellows found themselves in the minority and only whispered their -belief. - -Mr. Willett and Hank Tims were still under guard, for the promised proof -of their innocence was not at hand; but Si Brill and Collins, now the -most prominent men in the camp, felt that the end they hoped for was -very near. - -Ulna, after being refreshed with food, kept his eyes open, and he was -the first to discover that Badger, Shirley and the others had left -Hurley's Gulch. - -He at once sought out Collins and said to him: - -"I saw the four men ride away." - -"But men are ridin' away and a-ridin' in all the time," said Collins, -who not being at all suspicious saw no harm in the act. - -"True, Collins; but I am sure these men mean harm to Sam Willett." - -"Nonsense." - -"It is the truth." - -"But you left Sam in the hands of them onary 'Paches, didn't you?" - -"Yes." - -"Then how can Badger get at him?" - -"The Apaches say they are not at war with the whites----" - -"I don't take no stock in them or their sayin's," said Collins. - -"But they are at peace, else they would have killed Sam at once. As it -is they will either rob him and turn him loose, or else hold him for a -reward." - -"Well?" said Collins reflectively. - -"And if Badger and his gang meet the Apaches and pay the reward, then -they will have Sam Willett in their power----" - -"Hold!" cried Collins. "I see it all! Once in their power they will kill -the boy and get the receipt Tom Edwards gave when he was paid for the -mine. Then the dogs can come back here and defy us. We must move to the -rescue, Ulna! We must move at once!" - -Accompanied by Ulna, Collins went to Si Brill and others of his friends, -and after warning them to say nothing to Mr. Willett, he told them of -his fears for Sam and urged the necessity of getting out a rescuing -party at once, which he was ready to lead "if no one else didn't offer." - -At this time there were not many horses in camp, and unfortunately -nearly all were owned by the men who had been so bitter against Mr. -Willett. - -It was after midnight when Collins succeeded in getting three horses and -a mule; they belonged to Mr. Willett and this limited the rescuing party -to four, one of whom was Ulna, who went along as a guide, though all -knew he could be depended on if there were serious work on hand. - -About two hours before day they came face to face with the landlord and -his companion. - -"Where have you fellers been?" demanded Tom Collins. - -"I don't know that it's any of your business," was the landlord's reply, -"but I don't mind sayin' that we went out to see if thar was any Injuns -in sight. For one, I didn't take any stock in that young Ute's story." - -"Wa'al," said Collins, "there's plenty of better men than you--and I'm -one of 'em, that do believe the Ute. Now what have you done with Badger -and Shirley?" - -"They left us 'bout dark; if you want them you must hunt 'em for -yourself. I ain't no one's dog," growled the landlord. - -"The man that had you for his dog might count on bein' bit, but I reckon -we ken find out all we want without yer help. Go back to the Gulch and -pack yer traps, for it's my 'pinion it'll be very hot there in a day or -two for dogs of your breed," said Collins as he shook his bridle and -rode on. - -Meantime Sam, ignorant of the doings of friends and foe, kept watch on -the summit of the rock. - -He was completely "played out," and it was only by a strong effort of -will and a constant change of position that he kept from sinking down -and going to sleep like his companions. - -As soon as the gray dawn began to make distant objects visible Sam awoke -Ike and Wah Shin. - -Sleep had only brought a temporary cessation from the pangs of hunger, -but the brave fellows made no complaint. - -Ike, always on the lookout, was the first to discover horsemen in the -distance, coming from the direction of Hurley's Gulch. - -"It 'peahs to me powahful like's ef Ulna is one ob dem yar men," said -Ike. - -He was not mistaken. - -On came the riders at a gallop. - -In the advance rode Ulna. - -As soon as they caught sight of Sam they waved their hats and sent up a -thrilling cheer. - -[Illustration: _Sam and Ike discover the horsemen coming to their -rescue._] - -Even the horses caught the spirit of their riders, and plunged into a -faster gallop, till they came to a halt under the towering rock which -Sam had defended so gallantly. - - - - -CHAPTER XXVII.--SAM'S DEVOTION IS REWARDED. - - -"Hello!" shouted Collins, as he and his companions dismounted and looked -up at the three famished people on the rock. "How did you three gents -and the dog git up thar?" - -It was evident from this question that Collins was not acquainted with -the rock. - -"On the other side," said Sam. - -"All right; we'll find the way and come up." - -"Better save the trouble," said Sam. "We'll come down, and glad we are -of the chance." - -"Glad!" cried Ike; "dat word don't nigh begin foh to 'spress dis yar -chile's feelin's. I'ze full, chuck full ob downright bliss, I is. Come -along, Maj and Wah, foh it does seem powahful like's ef de trouble had -jest 'bout come to an ind." - -Down over the ruin of the wall they clambered, and at the foot stood -Ulna--the faithful. - -The Indian may be a stoic under suffering, but there are no people in -the world so ready to give expression to joy, nor so demonstrative where -the better impulses of the heart are called out. - -"Sam! Sam! My friend, thank God you are safe!" cried Ulna, and his eyes -looked larger and blacker for their tears as he caught his friend to his -breast and kissed him first on one cheek and then on the other. - -Ike and Wah Shin shook hands with every one again and again, and then -they jointly performed a joy-dance, in which the dog joined, to the -music of his own glad barking. - -"Looks like's ef you'd been corralled up thar," said Collins, looking up -at the defense and down at the red stains on the stones at the bottom. - -"We have that," replied Sam, and then briefly and with characteristic -modesty, he told of the fight of the night before. - -"And the paper," said Collins; "the receipt Tom Edwards said he didn't -give yer father?" - -"I've got it here," said Sam, pointing to the saddle-bags slung over his -shoulder. - -"Wa'al, I felt most sure it'd turn up. But what became of Badger and -Shirley?" - -"I think they were hurt, but I hope not badly," said Sam. - -"Some one's hurt, and purty bad, too," said one of Collins' men. - -"How do you know that, Jack?" - -"Jest look over thar, Collins," said the man, pointing to a wall some -distance off, at the side of which two men appeared to be sleeping. - -On the instant all went over, and they discovered Shirley and Badger. - -The former was dead, but an examination showed that he had received no -wound that would account for his demise. - -"No, boys," groaned Badger, "he wasn't hurt much at all, but I was the -feller that suffered." - -"Then how did Shirley come to die?" asked Collins. - -"Die! Coz, he was a coward." - -"What do you mean, Badger?" - -"He said the game was up, so he took poison to finish hisself." - -"Poison!" exclaimed all. - -"Yes, poison. He wanted me to take some, too, but I'd rather hang. Look -round and you'll find the thing that held it." - -The searchers did not have far to look, for clasped in the dead man's -right hand they found a small vial with a death's head and cross-bones -on the label, which contained the legend, in red letters, "Sulph. -Morphia." - -"Badger." - -"Yes, Collins." - -"What brought you fellows out here?" - -"Can't you guess?" - -"I can, but I'd rather you'd tell me." - -"And you won't think no harder of me for it." - -"Badger," replied Collins, "I can't think of anything you could -do--unless you chanced to be decent--that would make me think any -different of you than I do now." - -"Wa'al, I reckon I ain't got long to live, so I'll tell the downright -truth for once----" - -"What is it?" - -"Shirley, Jake and another feller came out with me to do for young -Willett, but we didn't connect. Thar, that's all I'll say at present," -and Badger closed his eyes and looked to be as dead as the man lying by -his side. - -"Men that starts out to make the life-path hard for other folks," said -Collins, with much feeling in his voice, "generally fetches up with a -short turn themselves, and falls into the pit dug for others. Now, boys, -what's best to be did next?" - -"Thar's nothin' to be did," said the man who had spoken before, "but to -sarch the body and then bury it. This is as good a place as back at the -Gulch. When we've did that we'll tote Badger 'long with us and let him -tell his story." - -As this advice seemed good, it was acted on at once. - -After taking from the pockets such valuables and papers as might cast -light on his own life, or be sent to his friends, the men scraped out a -grave with their knives, and in it they laid the body of the man who had -ruined himself in trying "to make the life-path hard for other folks." - -When preparations were being made for the return to Hurley's Gulch, -Badger--who evidently thought he was to be left there--lost all the -coarse spirit that once characterized him, and he whined: - -"Oh, don't leave me out here to the wolves, boys. Take me to the Gulch -with you and I'll confess all." - -"We'll tote you back, never fear," said Collins. "We ain't the kind of -men that like to see sufferin', even if it's deserved." - -The horses of Shirley and Badger were found near by. One of these was -given to Sam, who said he would carry Wah Shin behind him if some one -else would carry Ike. - -Ulna, who rode a mule and was the lightest one of the party, gladly -consented to ride double with Ike. This being arranged, the next -question was the conveyance of the wounded Badger. - -He was given stimulants from his own canteen, and then lifted into his -own saddle. With a strong man on either side to keep him from falling, -the party started back to Hurley's Gulch. - -Within two hours they were at their destination, but long before they -reached there they were seen and recognized by those who had been kindly -disposed to Mr. Willett, and an extemporized committee came out to meet -them. - -"The paper! The paper! Have you got Tom Edwards' receipt?" was the -salutation that greeted Sam, as dozens of sturdy men gathered round and -shook his hand. - -He had prepared for this by taking the water-stained paper from the -saddle-bags, to which he had clung through all his privations. - -"Here it is!" cried Sam, holding the receipt aloft. "Here it is, and I -will intrust it to Mr. Collins while I go to my father." - -A rousing cheer went up from the men, and that cheer was heard in the -dugout by Mr. Willett and Hank Tims, and reading its meaning aright, -they raised their tearful eyes and thanked God. - - - - -CHAPTER XXXVIII.--THE LAST, BUT NOT THE LEAST IMPORTANT. - - -Si Brill heard the shouting, and leaving his friends--the prisoners--to -care for themselves he fairly flew out of the ravine. - -He saw his "pard" holding the paper aloft and he understood all. The -glow of a well-earned victory came to his bronzed face, and he sent up a -cheer that started all the echoes in the gulch into life. - -"All is lovely, Si!" shouted Collins. "We got the receipt, and the boy's -safe. Don't wait a second but take him to his father at once. His heart -is jist a hungerin' to hold young Sam next to it." - -"You're right every time, old pard!" shouted Si Brill. - -Sam ran to him and he was on the point of asking where his father was, -when Si caught him in his arms and gave him such a hug as would have -crushed one of weaker frame. - -He would have carried Sam in triumph on his broad shoulders, had that -young gentleman consented. As it was he took his hand, and raising his -hat in the other, he ran down the gulch, cheering all the while as if -the sound were essential to his progress. - -Mr. Willett stood in the door of the dugout. He saw Si accompanied by a -tall, slender youth. No need to tell him who it was. - -With the cry, "My boy! Oh, thank Heaven for my boy," Mr. Willett ran out -and father and son were clasped in each other's arms, and their kisses -and their tears mingled. - -"See h'ar, Mr. Willett," called out Hank Tims, who had followed up his -friend, "when you've got through a huggin' young Sam, jist turn him over -to me and let me have a chance to express my sentiments on this -occasion." - -At sound of the dear old hunter's voice, Sam turned to him with extended -hands and cried out: - -"Hank, old friend, I've been through the great cañon." - -"Well!" laughed Hank, as he shook Sam's hands, and patted his back by -turns, "you look as if you'd been dragged through a narrer knot hole, -but yer eyes are as bright as ever and you'll soon git flesh on yer -bones, but through the Gerrait Cañon! oh, come, Sam, don't try to fool -me so soon after we've been parted for so long----" - -"But didn't Ulna tell you?" - -"So he did, Sam, but I thought mebbe his mind was affected. But never -mind, we'll have lots of time to talk over our adventures when we git -back to Gold Cave Camp. Well, well, I never did think, leastwise not -lately, that I'd ever live to see so happy a day as this," and Hank -turned his attention to Ike and Wah Shin, who had come upon the scene, -nor was the dog forgotten in the warm welcome given to all. - -"I tell you, Mistah Willett," said Ike, as he held his old employer's -hand, "I'ze got enough to talk about till the day I die, even if I was -to live for a thousand years." - -"Which I hope you may, Ike. But what is that noise up the hill?" asked -Mr. Willett, his attention attracted by the prolonged cheering in that -direction. - -They had not long to wonder, for soon Collins came dashing down the -hill, his eyes glowing and a flush of triumph on his manly face. - -"What's up, pard?" asked Si Brill. - -"They've got at the truth!" shouted Collins. - -"What truth?" - -"The truth about the murder." - -"Then you showed them the receipt?" said Mr. Willett, again taking Sam's -hand. - -"Yes; I did all that, and even then some of 'em wanted to doubt; but -something has happened to settle 'em." - -"What's that?" asked Hank. - -"The landlord has lit out----" - -"Oh!" - -"But that's not all," continued Collins. "Badger is dead----" - -"Dead!" echoed all. - -"Yes, dead; but just before he pegged out he confessed that it was him -killed Tom Edwards----" - -"I was right in my belief," said Mr. Willett solemnly. - -"Yes," continued Collins, "and now every man in the camp, even those -that was the bitterest, are jest achin' to see you, and to congratulate -you, and to ax yer parding; so let's go up. Thar's no danger to you nor -your's in Hurley's Gulch now," and there was a ring of pride in the -brave fellow's voice. - -The Gold Cave campers, happier than we can describe over their reunion, -followed Collins from the dugout to the canvas settlement on the bluff. - -As soon as the assembled miners caught sight of them they sent up such a -glad shout as was never heard before nor since on the banks of that -particular gulch. - -At heart the great mass of men are right, and they mean to do right. -Among these miners there seemed to be a general disposition to make -amends as speedily as possible for their past errors. - -Not satisfied with cheering and shouting their congratulations, they -rushed in by twos and fours, and beginning with Mr. Willett, they lifted -all the Gold Cave campers--not neglecting Ike and Wah Shin--to their -shoulders, and then marched in triumphal procession to the scene of the -trial at the hotel. - -The flight of the proprietor did not seem to make any difference, for -there was plenty of food and cooks to prepare the banquet. - -Ike went at once to the place where Wah Shin was helping to get dinner. - -"I'll kind o' fill up a little, Wah," said Ike, as he laid siege to a -big loaf of bread and a correspondingly large piece of cold meat, "for -it'll take me jist 'bout a year's steady feedin' to catch up. You can -bet that I'll never be sorry again that I didn't eat moah w'en I had a -good chance." - -Maj seemed to be of the same opinion, for he did not leave Ike's side -for hours, and when he was next seen in public, he was truly aldermanic -in his girth and evidently on good terms with himself and the world. - -After a hearty dinner, which no one enjoyed more than Sam, speeches in -praise of "the young cañoneers" as they were called, were made, and -resolutions expressing unbounded confidence in Mr. Willett and Hank Tims -were passed. - -And so ended the happiest day Hurley's Gulch had ever seen, or ever saw -again. - -The next day our friends returned to Gold Cave Camp, but before starting -off, Mr. Willett purchased the articles Sam had promised to send to the -Indians, and Si Brill and Collins pledged themselves to deliver them. - -Here our story ends, yet it may not be amiss to add a few words -explanatory of the future of the characters in whom we have been so much -interested. - -Mr. Willett made a good deal of money out of the Gold Cave Camp -property, but the danger from floods led him after a time to sell it at -a sacrifice. - -Years have passed since these adventures came to a close. To-day -"Willett & Son" are among the richest and most honored miners and -bankers in the Far West. - -Their porter in the bank is our old friend, Ike; indeed so great is his -interest in the establishment and so highly does he think of his -position that he is very positive it could not go on for a day without -him. - -He always speaks of the firm as "we." - -"We's doin' fine," is a frequent expression of his, though nothing -delights him so much as to tell of his adventures in the Great Cañon. He -sneers at all other human exploits as things of no account compared with -the events in which he played so prominent a part. - -Mr. Willett's cook is the faithful Wah Shin. "Wah really runs the -house," Sam says, but he always adds, "and it could not be run better. -Wah is a standing proof that the Mongolian has a bright mind and a -generous heart--that is if you get one of the right kind and treat him -right." - -Strange though it may seem, Ulna, as Mr. Willett's protege, came east -and studied medicine, and his skill and judgment are making him famous -in the West. We need not add that there is one house in Denver where -"Doctor Ulna" is always a welcome and an honored guest. - -"Collins, Brill & Tims" is the firm name of one of the most prosperous -"concerns" in Colorado. - -It is not necessary for us to speak separately of the members in order -to have them recognized, though it may not be amiss to say that they are -all married men, and are among the largest depositors in the bank of -Willett & Son. - -They make the banker's house their home when in Denver, and although -Hurley's Gulch has been long since abandoned, and the wolf unfrightened -howls over its site, they love to talk over the stirring days when a -son's devotion proved itself more powerful than Lynch law and vigilance -committees. - - - - -LOST. - - -In the summer of 1864 Paul Seeton went to spend his holidays with his -cousin, Frank More. - -Frank lived in the northern part of Maine, on the outskirts of a vast -forest. Paul was a Boston boy, who had scarcely ever been out of the -city in his life. - -It was in Aroostook county, a place famous for growing the biggest -timber in the northern states, a place known to lumbermen and loved by -them; with few inhabitants except those who are engaged in the timber -trade; with no villages and no roads. - -One day Frank proposed a fishing excursion. Their destination was about -fifteen miles away, on a chain of lakes that extended far into the -forest. - -They set out at break of day, rode on horseback over a rough road for -about two hours, and at length reached the shore of a lake. - -Here they hired a boat from a man who lived in a log house, and -embarking, sailed for five or six miles to a place where the lake -narrowed. Here taking down their sail they rowed for some distance -through a channel so narrow that the branches of the lofty pines on -either side almost met. It took a good hour to pass through this, when -suddenly they emerged from it and found themselves on a second lake, -three or four times as large as the first. - -Up went the sail again, and away they went over the second lake for -about ten miles. All around grew the primeval forest, dense, dark and -luxuriant. But Frank had been here before, and the scene was quite -familiar. - -The boat went swiftly onward, and at last approached the farthest -extremity of the lake. Here a small peninsula jutted forth from the -forest into the lake, which was cleared and under cultivation. Upon it -arose a log hut, from the rude chimney of which smoke was curling -upward. - -It belonged to a man named Spence, who cultivated the ground in summer -and in winter went lumbering in the woods. He lived there all alone, and -apart from his solitude was very comfortable. - -The boat grounded on the beach in front of Spence's hut, and the boys -went up to the house. They found Spence himself at home, cooking his -dinner. - -The boys did not stay long. After asking a few questions as to the best -fishing holes, they took to the boat again, and following Spence's -directions, rowed toward a small creek which penetrated among the hills, -and passing up this, at length came to a small basin enclosed by high -wooded shores. Here they began to fish. - -Although they waited patiently, they found, to their great -disappointment, that the fish would not come. At length Paul felt a -bite; he pulled up his line in a fever of agitation, and with a glow of -triumph jerked into the boat a tiny fish about four inches long. But -Paul's triumph was not at all shared by Frank. - -"Pooh!" said he, "it's only a miserable perch." - -"A perch?" said Paul. "Isn't it a good fish?" - -"Good? Why, these lakes are crammed with them. It's trout we want, not -these." And as Frank said this he jerked his own line with some -complacency. Soon something bit his bait. He jerked it out and found, to -his disgust, another perch. - -At length Frank said that he was going up the woods a little distance, -to a lake which was about a mile off, connected with this by a brook. He -could follow the windings of the brook and easily get there. - -Paul, however, thought he would stay where he was, for the woods looked -very rough, and he enjoyed being in a boat, even if he didn't catch -anything. - -So Frank started off, promising to be back within an hour. - -Paul continued his fishing. He moved the boat to the opposite shore. No -bites came--that is, none came to the bait, but he soon became aware of -other bites, which he did not expect. These were produced by swarms of -mosquitoes, which gathered so thickly that at last Paul had to pull in -his line and give himself to self-defense. He shifted the position of -the boat a dozen times, but his persecutors followed him. At last he -could stand it no longer, and concluded to go after Frank. - -Nearly an hour had passed, and it was about time for Frank to return. It -was Paul's intention to stroll along the brook, and he would be certain -either to meet Frank in his return, or else he would find him at the -lake to which he had gone. - -It was very swampy, and Paul sank in up to his knees for some distance, -but at length reached rising ground. The brook was only a small one, and -was bordered by such dense underbrush that Paul found it impossible to -follow it. In fact, a much better path appeared. - -This was a rough track, overgrown with moss and ferns, which was used by -the lumbermen in winter. It went up from the lake apparently in the same -direction as the brook. - -So he walked along this path, forcing his way through alder bushes and -tangled ferns, until at last he came to a stop in front of a wide and -impassable marsh. - -The lumber path in winter ran across this, but now it could not be -traversed. So Paul tried to go around it. But after completing about -half the circuit, he reached a swampy place which he could not cross. - -He now retraced his steps, and at length decided to return to the boat -and wait there. - -The lumber path could not be very easily found, but at last he turned -into a place which looked very much like it, and walked on for some -distance. But the way was rough. At length the path ceased altogether. -He found himself in the wild wood. - -He saw now that he had missed the path, but thought that the best plan -would be to keep straight on, and get back to the lake. So he kept on. -It was very hard work. The ground was covered with moss, in some places -it was spongy, in others it was overgrown with ferns, while every now -and then he would have to climb over the trunk of some fallen tree. - -In this way he struggled onward for a long time, and wondered why he -could not see any signs of the lake. At last he began to grow -discouraged. The full conviction forced itself upon him that he had lost -his way. He had been wandering; how long a time and how far he did not -know. - -There were no signs whatever of the lake. What to do he could not tell. -He stood still, and looked around. Dense forest trees arose on every -side, shutting out the view, and enclosing him with their gloomy shades. - -Then he called as loud as he could. There was no answer. He called again -and again, and waited for a long time after each cry to hear whether -there was any response. But none came. - -What to do now was the question. He was not a coward, but any one might -well have been alarmed, lost in those vast, trackless forests. Paul was -alarmed, of course; but he was a spirited boy, and was not inclined to -sit down and give up. After a few minutes he wisely decided that it was -necessary to have some plan, and choose some definite direction in which -to go. - -So he concluded that the safest way for him would be to retrace his -steps as carefully as possible. - -Back he went, and managed to recover his track, but lost sight of it -again, and found himself once more completely at a loss. - -Turning on his own track in this way had only severed him utterly from -the last faint hold which he had on the possible direction of the lake. - -Once more he stood and considered, and finally after making up his mind -as to the probable position of the lake, he started again with the -determination to keep on in as straight a line as possible in that one -direction. - -His course was rough and toilsome in the extreme. Swamps, bogs, thick -ferns, dense underbrush, tangled alders, fallen forest trees, huge -rocks, all came by turns before his path, and all had by turns to be -passed through or surmounted. Paul's city life had not fitted him for a -task like this; but despair gave him strength. - -Hours passed. Every hour brought fresh difficulties. His strength and -resolution gradually gave way. No signs of escape had shown themselves. -No sounds had come to his ears which promised help. He felt himself -alone; alone to struggle with his dismal fate. - -At last he reached rising ground. Here the woods were clear. The trees -stood far apart, and the walking was easy. Utterly worn out, he toiled -on and at length reached the crest of the hill. - -Scarcely had he done so than an exclamation burst from him. Immediately -below lay a broad sheet of water. He hurried down to the margin, and -looked anxiously around in all directions. - -There was nothing, however, but a sheet of water surrounded by woods. -Whether this was the lake which he had left, or some other one, he could -not tell. At any rate he was too fatigued to make any further exertion, -so he flung himself upon the ground to rest. - -Gradually sleep overtook him, and his slumber was so sound that he -actually did not awake till the following day. On rousing himself he -heard the birds singing, and felt the fresh, cool air of the morning. - -He was very hungry, but felt rested and refreshed, and went at once to -examine his position. - -From the place where he stood he could see the end of the lake to the -right, but on the left the view was impeded by a promontory. - -His first effort now was to go to the promontory and examine the other -end. The distance was not great, and he soon reached the place. - -He looked eagerly down the lake, when, to his unutterable delight, he -saw at the lower end the lone cottage to which the boat had carried him -the day before. - -All was now plain. He had wandered back to the lake blindly, and by such -an extraordinary circuit that he had come to the shore about five miles -away from the cottage. - -He now set forth to work his way back to the cottage. He followed the -windings of the shores, keeping the water always in sight. The distance -was only five or six miles, but so circuitous was the shore, so full of -indentations, and so rough was the way, that it was nearly evening when -he reached the cottage. - -No one was there when he arrived, but he waited, and at dusk a boat came -over the water with Spence and Frank. For a day and a half they had been -scouring the woods for him, and Frank, in his despair, did not know what -to do. Paul was received as one who had risen from the dead. - - - - -FATE OF AN ENTRAPPED BEAR. - - -Wild beasts, in their wanderings through the forests, often meet and -fight in the most savage manner. Here is a story told the writer, last -summer, by an old gentleman in Somerest county, Maine: - -"One of the toughest fights I ever saw," said he, "came off over behind -that mountain yonder. It was years ago. Perhaps I saw with a boy's eyes -at that time; I was but fourteen years old, then. But you shall have the -story: - -"There wa'n't a railroad in the state, in those days. Whenever any of -the farmers wanted to go down to Farmington, or Norridgewock, or to -Portland, they had to go with their teams; and when making a trip to the -latter place were often gone a week or ten days. - -"Quite late in the fall my father and Mr. Wilber, our nearest neighbor, -had gone to Portland in company. Always during their absence we boys -used the time in fishing, gunning, and other sports such as boys delight -in. They had been gone two days, when early the third morning after -their departure Jed Wilber came running to our house, all excitement. - -"'The bears have been killing our sheep!' he exclaimed. 'They came into -the little pasture last night, killed the old four-year-old, and a lamb, -dragged them out into the bushes, and there we found their pelts taken -off and rolled up, as nice as a butcher could do it.' - -"'Oh, you ought to have shut them up, Jed,' said grandmother. - -"'I know it,' said Jed. 'Father told us to, every night. But we were -playing last night, and forgot it.' - -"'The bear'll be back, to-night,' said I. - -"'Of course he will,' said Jed, 'and that's what I am over here for--I -want to get your bear-trap. I know just how to set it,' he went on, -seeing grandmother hesitate. 'I saw 'em set it last winter a dozen -times.' - -"'Well, you can have the trap,' said grandmother. 'But mind it don't -spring, and catch your hands or feet.' - -"Jed and I brought the trap from the woodhouse chamber. It was -tremendously heavy--weighing sixty or seventy pounds. But between us we -carried it up to the Wilbers', and with Sol's help (Sol was Jed's next -younger brother) we took it to the pasture. Then, by using a crowbar we -managed, after a deal of prying and holding, to press down the stiff -springs, and so set it. This done, we chained it to a four-foot log of -green spruce, and left it near the spot where the bear had killed the -sheep. For a bait, we laid partially under it a sheep's head, from a -sheep that had lately been slaughtered by Mr. Wilber. - -"Perhaps some of the boys may wonder why the lads did not chain the trap -to a stump, or a standing tree. Hunters never chain a bear-trap fast to -the spot where they set it. They clog it, that is, fasten a heavy stick -or log to it, for the bear to drag. If caught and held fast, at first, a -large bear would demolish any trap. But if allowed to run with it, the -clog will at length weary him so that he may be easily overtaken and -shot. - -"Early the next morning," continued the old man, "I ran over to -Wilber's, and we hurried to the pasture. The sheep's head was gone, but -the bear, if indeed it was one, had kept his legs out of the trap. We -rebaited it with mutton shanks, and the next morning Jed came to the -house before I was dressed. - -"'The trap's gone!' he shouted. 'Get your gun. We must follow him!' - -"Hastily swallowing some breakfast, I loaded the gun with slugs, and -with Jed and Sol rushed to the pasture. Sure enough the trap was gone, -clog and all. The place where it had been placed bore marks of a -struggle; the turf was gouged up, and in several spots there were -blood-drops on the grass, and on the dry leaves. It was in October, the -last of the month. The brakes in the woods were dead, but still -standing. These had been pressed to the ground, and made a broad trail. - -"By noon we gained the crest of a high ridge, or mountain, five or six -miles to the westward. The farther side fell off abruptly to the bank of -a small river. This side, too, was covered with thick hemlock and -spruce. We hesitated about going further. It would be nearly night by -the time we got back, if we started for home now. But we wanted to save -the trap. If we went back, not only should we lose the bear, but the -trap besides, and Jed, whose carelessness had cost the loss of two -sheep, was especially anxious to get the bear. - -"Sol had brought a lunch. We divided it between us, and again taking up -our guns, followed the trail down into the dark growth, toward the -river. An hour took us to the stream. But here, instead of coming upon -the bear, as we had expected, we found that he had turned up the bank to -the north. We kept on, however. There was a sort of fascination in the -chase, even though every mile was taking us further into the wilderness. - -"The late October afternoon was waning. Already the shadow of a large -mountain to the westward was falling over the forest, in the valley -where we were. The valley narrowed to a rocky ravine as we went on, and -the mountain, with its dark spruces, seemed to tower threateningly over -us. - -"'It's no use, Jed,' said I; 'we ought to go home. I know you want----' - -"'Hark!' exclaimed Sol. - -"A sharp yelp, as if from a hurt dog, rang out. It seemed to come to us -from only a short distance. Almost instantly it was followed by a long -yell, and a chorus of howls. Snap ran, crouching, between our legs. - -"'Wolves!' cried Jed. - -"We stood listening, breathlessly. In a moment the yell burst out again, -followed by yelps, snarls, and the sounds of a general fight. - -"'I'll bet they're afoul of the bear,' whispered Jed. - -"The uproar continued. - -"'If they are, they won't mind us,' continued Jed. 'Let's creep up, and -see.' - -"Cocking our guns, we moved cautiously forward. The yells grew louder, -and we heard growls. At length, turning a little bend of the ravine, we -peered round a great boulder and saw a sight I shall never forget. With -his back against a rock sat the bear--a tremendous fellow he -looked--with the trap on his paw, while about him leaped, and surged, -and snapped, fifteen or twenty gray wolves, their white teeth grinning, -and their eyes flashing green fire. The bear was fighting for life -against the whole of them. - -"The wolves had struck upon his trail, and the smell of the blood that -came from the leg crushed in the trap had made them furious. He fought -hard, swinging the trap clog, as he struck with his forelegs to beat -them off. - -"Occasionally, as the ravenous creatures leaped at his throat, he would -catch one with his uninjured paw and give him a hug that drew out a -smothered yelp. Sometimes five or six of the wolves would jump at the -bear at the same time, and for a moment we would lose sight of him, but -he brushed them away, and rose again. The growls, yells and snapping -jaws were savage beyond description. It grew dusk as we watched the -fight. - -"'What can we do?' said Sol. - -"'It would be useless for us to interfere,' said I; 'they're bound to -have him.' - -"'Let's fire among them, though,' said Jed; 'I haven't brought a loaded -gun up here for nothing. All together now.' - -"All three of us fired together at the growling, struggling pack. - -"A moment's silence followed the reports, then a long howl. We shrank -back around the boulder, out of sight. Then a sudden panic seized us, -and we ran down the ravine, and did not stop till we were a mile below. -A faint howl came echoing through the somber forest. - -"'They are not chasing us,' said Jed; 'guess we riddled some of 'em!' - -"Night fell as we climbed the steep ridge. We had a dark time going home -through the woods. Fortunately, Sol had a match in his pocket, and -coming to an old white birch stub, we tore off several rolls of the -dried bark. By fastening these to the end of a stick and lighting them, -we were able to pick our way through the woods. It was a hazy night. The -moon showed dimly. The glimpses we now and then got of it enabled us to -keep a straight course. It was after eight o'clock when we reached home, -and worried enough the folks had been about us. - -"The next forenoon we started for the ravine again. We were curious to -know how the fight terminated; besides, it was best to get the trap, if -possible, to avert the storm that would burst on Jed's head when his -father came home. Taking a shorter cut through the woods, we reached the -place where we had seen the wolves, about eleven o'clock. - -"No sound was heard save the rippling of the stream among the rocks. We -stole cautiously to the boulder, where we had stood the night before, -and looked from behind it. Nothing was in sight. - -"'Gone,' said Jed. 'Let's go up, and see where they had their fight.' - -"A sly little mink darted away, and into the stream as we approached. -Beyond was a ghastly sight! There lay the skull and bones of the bear, -gnawed clean, and showing yellow-white; and there lay the trap, still -gripping with its iron jaws the bone of one paw. - -"All the brakes were smashed down, and the bushes and the rock were -besmeared with blood and hair. About the trap, within a radius of a few -rods, lay the bones and skulls of two of the wolves, eaten by their -comrades. Perhaps the bear had killed them, or perchance our shots had -caused their death. It looked as if other wolves had come to the feast. - -"'Come, come!' muttered Jed. 'Let's be off before they come back.' - -"We took the trap to the stream to cleanse it, and then placing it on -two poles we started for home. And a _tug_ it gave us, too!" - - - - -A FIGHT IN THE WOODS. - - -Some years ago, while in the northern part of Maine, I spent the month -of September and a portion of October at a "hay-farm" on the borders of -Chamberlain Lake--Lake Apmoogenegamook, the Indians used to call it. The -whole region was almost an unbroken wilderness. Game was plenty, and by -way of recreation from my duties as an assistant engineer I had set up a -"line of traps" for mink and sable--"saple," as old trappers say--along -a small but very rapid, noisy stream called Bear Brook, which comes down -into the lake through a gorge between two high spruce-clad mountains. - -Huge boulders had rolled down the sides, and lay piled along the bed of -the gorge. The brook, which was the outlet of a small pond, pent up -among the ridges above, foamed and roared and gurgled down among rocks -shaded by thick, black spruces, which leaned out from the sides of the -ravine. - -It was a wild place. I had stumbled upon it, one afternoon, while -hunting a caribou (a kind of deer) some weeks before, and knew it must -be good trapping ground; for the rocks and clear, black pools, in short -the whole place had that peculiar, fishy smell which bespoke an -abundance of trout; and where trout abound there are sure to be mink. - -My traps were of that sort which hunters call "figure four" traps, made -of stakes and poles, with a figure-four spring. Perhaps some of our boy -readers may have caught squirrels in that way. For bait I used trout -from the brook. I carried my hook and line with me, and after setting a -trap, threw in my hook and pulled out trout enough to bait it. My line -extended about a mile up the gorge, and comprised some twenty-five or -thirty traps. - -After setting them, I shot a number of red squirrels for a "drag," and -thus connected the traps together. Perhaps I should explain that a -_drag_ is a bundle of squirrels or partridges newly killed and from -which the blood is dripping, which are dragged along by a withe from -trap to trap to make a trail and scent, so that the mink and sable will -follow it. - -It is customary to visit mink traps once in two or three days. But as I -had plenty of time just then, I went to mine every forenoon. - -During the first week after setting them I had excellent luck. I caught -eleven mink and three sable--about fifty dollars' worth, as I reckoned -it. My hopes of making a small fortune in the fur business were very -sanguine, until one morning I found every trap torn up! The poles and -stakes were scattered over the ground, spindles were broken to pieces, -and at one or two places where there had been a mink in the trap, the -head and bits of fur were lying about as if it had been devoured. - -At first I thought that perhaps some fellow who had intended to trap -there had done the mischief to drive me away (a very common trick among -rival trappers); but when I saw that the minks had been torn to pieces, -I knew the destruction was the work of some animal--a fisher, most -likely, or as some call it, a "black-cat." - -I had never yet seen one of these creatures, but had often heard hunters -and trappers tell what pests they were, following them on their rounds, -robbing and tearing up their traps almost as rapidly as they could set -them. Indeed, I had read in Baird's--I believe it was Baird's--Works on -Natural History, that the fisher-cat, or _mustela canadensis_, is a very -fierce carnivorous animal of the weasel family, a most determined -fighter and more than a match for a common hound. - -Well, I had nothing to do but to set the traps again, a task which I did -in the course of the day, really hoping that the beast had merely paid -the place a transient visit, and gone on upon his wanderings. - -But the next morning showed my hopes were vain, for he had "gone -through" my _line_ again, and every trap was upset. It really seemed as -if the "varmint" had taken a malicious delight in tearing them to -pieces. - -At one of the traps a fine sable had been caught, and as if for very -mischief the marauder had torn the beautiful skin, which was worth ten -or a dozen dollars, to shreds. - -Surely, if there is a business in the world that demands patience and -perseverance, it is trapping. At least it took about all I could summon -to go resignedly to work, make new spindles, catch fresh bait, and set -the traps again, especially with the prospect of having the same task to -perform the next morning. - -I went at it, however, and by eleven o'clock had them all reset save -one, the upper one, where the sable had been caught, when, on -approaching it through the thick spruces, I saw a large raccoon gnawing -the sable's head. Seeing me at the same instant, he caught up the head, -and before I could unsling my gun scuttled away out of sight. - -Was it possible that a 'coon had been doing all this mischief? I knew -them to be adepts at a variety of woods tricks, but had never heard of -their robbing traps before. Here was one caught gnawing a sable's head -in the vicinity of the broken traps. Circumstantial evidence, as they -say in court, was strong against him. - -I determined to watch--that trap, at least. - -Going over to our camp on the lake, I took a hasty lunch, and putting a -fresh charge into my gun went back to the ravine. A few rods from the -place where I had surprised the 'coon there was a thick clump of low -spruces. Here I hid myself and began my watch. - -The afternoon dragged away. Crows and hawks cawed and screamed; -kingfishers and squirrels chickered and chirred, but no animal came near -the traps. The sun was setting behind the high, black mountain, twilight -began to dim the narrow valley. - -Thinking I had had my labor for my pains, I was about crawling out of my -hiding-place, when a twig snapped in the direction of the traps, and -turning quickly I saw the 'coon coming up the bank of the brook, the -same one, I was sure, that I had seen before, because of its unusual -size. - -With a glance around, to see that there was no danger near, he ambled -along to the spot where the sable's head had been, and began sniffing at -the shreds and bits of fur which lay about. Wishing to see if he would -touch the trap, I did not stir, but watched his movements. - -After picking up the bits of skin, he walked round the trap several -times, with his queer, quizzical face askew, examining it. Then -happening to scent one of the sable's legs which lay at a little -distance, he ran to it and began to eat it. I could hear his sharp teeth -upon the bones. Suddenly he stopped, listened, then growled. Very much -to my surprise, there was an answering growl. Then another and another -response. In a moment more, from behind a great rock in the bank, there -stole out a large, black animal, an object of the 'coon's utter -abhorrence, evidently. - -Fresh growls greeted the appearance of the intruder, who came stealthily -forward. He was a wicked looking fellow, and had evidently hostile -intentions. - -The 'coon rose to his feet, lifting his back like a bear or a cat, and -growling all the while. The newcomer crouched almost to the earth, but -continued to steal up to the 'coon until within a yard or two. - -There they stood facing each other, getting more angry every moment; and -evidently intended to have a big "set to." I had no wish to interfere, -and was contented to remain a spectator. The two thieves might settle -their quarrels between themselves. I wasn't at all certain to which of -them I stood indebted for my extra labor, and concluded to keep my -charge of shot for whichever of them survived the fray. - -The growls rose to shrieks; the fisher, for such I judged it to be, -wriggling his black tail, and the 'coon getting his back still higher. -Then came a sudden grab, quick as a flash, and a prodigious scuffle. -Over and over they rolled, grappling and tearing; now the gray tail -would whisk up in sight, then the black one. The fur flew, and that -strong, disagreeable odor, sometimes noticed when a cat spits, was -wafted out to my hiding-place. - -It was hard to tell which was the best fighter. Gray fur and black fur -seemed to be getting torn out in about equal snatches. Suddenly the -'coon got away from his antagonist, and running to the foot of a great -spruce tree standing near, went like a dart up the trunk to the lower -limbs. There he faced about. - -The fisher followed to the tree and looked up. He saw his late foe, -growled, and then began to climb after him. He was not so good a climber -as the 'coon, but scratched his way up with true weasel determination. -The moment he came within reach the raccoon jumped at him, regardless of -the height from the ground, and fastened upon his back. The shock caused -the fisher to lose his hold, and down both animals dropped with -tremendous force, sufficient to knock the breath out of them, I thought. -But they clung to each other, and dug and bit with the fury of maniacs. -'Coons are noted fighters; and as for the fishers, they never give up -while the breath of life is in them. - -Presently the 'coon broke away again, and once more ran to the tree, -this time going up its trunk, out of sight, among the branches at the -very top. It looked as if he was getting about all the fight he cared to -have. - -Not so with the big weasel. He instantly followed his antagonist, -clumsily but surely clawing his way up the trunk. It took him some time -to reach the top, but he got there at last. Another grapple ensued among -the very topmost boughs, and they both came tumbling to the ground, -catching at the limbs as they fell; but grappling afresh they rolled -down the steep bank to the edge of the water. - -Meanwhile it had grown so dark that I could but just see their writhing -forms. The growling, grappling sound continued, however, and I could -hear them splash in the water. Then there came a lull. One or the other -had "given in," I felt sure. Which was the victor? - -Cocking my gun, I crept to the bank. As nearly as I could make out the -situation, the fisher was holding the 'coon by the throat. - -I took a step forward. A twig snapped under my foot. Instantly a pair of -fiery eyes glared up at me in the gloom; and with a harsh snarl the -fisher raised himself. But the 'coon didn't stir; he was dead. - -It seemed almost too bad to shoot the victor of so desperate a fight; -but thinking of my traps I hardened my heart and fired. The fisher -reared up, fell over, then recovering its legs, leaped at me with all -the ferocity of its bloodthirsty race. But the heavy buckshot had surely -done its work, and with another attempt to spring at me the animal fell -back dead. - -I had no more trouble with my traps. - - - - THE END. - - - - - - *** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK LOST IN THE CAÑON *** - - - - -A Word from Project Gutenberg - - -We will update this book if we find any errors. - -This book can be found under: http://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/37466 - -Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no one -owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and -you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission -and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the -General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and -distributing Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works to protect the -Project Gutenberg(tm) concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a -registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for the eBooks, -unless you receive specific permission. If you do not charge anything -for copies of this eBook, complying with the rules is very easy. You may -use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative -works, reports, performances and research. They may be modified and -printed and given away - you may do practically _anything_ with public -domain eBooks. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, -especially commercial redistribution. - - - -The Full Project Gutenberg License - - -_Please read this before you distribute or use this work._ - -To protect the Project Gutenberg(tm) mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or -any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project -Gutenberg(tm) License available with this file or online at -http://www.gutenberg.org/license. - - -Section 1. General Terms of Use & Redistributing Project Gutenberg(tm) -electronic works - - -*1.A.* By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg(tm) -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the -terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all -copies of Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works in your possession. If -you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project -Gutenberg(tm) electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the -terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or -entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. - -*1.B.* "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things -that you can do with most Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works even -without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph -1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg(tm) electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement -and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic -works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -*1.C.* The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of -Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works. Nearly all the individual works -in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an -individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are -located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you -from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating -derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project -Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the -Project Gutenberg(tm) mission of promoting free access to electronic -works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg(tm) works in compliance with -the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg(tm) name -associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this -agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full -Project Gutenberg(tm) License when you share it without charge with -others. - -*1.D.* The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in -a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check -the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement -before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or -creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project -Gutenberg(tm) work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning -the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United -States. - -*1.E.* Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -*1.E.1.* The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg(tm) License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg(tm) work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with - almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away - or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License - included with this eBook or online at http://www.gutenberg.org - -*1.E.2.* If an individual Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic work is -derived from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating -that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can -be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying -any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a -work with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on -the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs -1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the -Project Gutenberg(tm) trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or -1.E.9. - -*1.E.3.* If an individual Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic work is -posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and -distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and -any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg(tm) License for all works posted -with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of -this work. - -*1.E.4.* Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project -Gutenberg(tm) License terms from this work, or any files containing a -part of this work or any other work associated with Project -Gutenberg(tm). - -*1.E.5.* Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg(tm) License. - -*1.E.6.* You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any -word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or -distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg(tm) work in a format other than -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version -posted on the official Project Gutenberg(tm) web site -(http://www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or -expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a -means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original -"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include -the full Project Gutenberg(tm) License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -*1.E.7.* Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg(tm) works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -*1.E.8.* You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works -provided that - - - You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg(tm) works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg(tm) trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - - - You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg(tm) - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg(tm) - works. - - - You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - - - You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg(tm) works. - - -*1.E.9.* If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg(tm) electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael -Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg(tm) trademark. Contact the -Foundation as set forth in Section 3. below. - -*1.F.* - -*1.F.1.* Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg(tm) collection. -Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works, and the -medium on which they may be stored, may contain "Defects," such as, but -not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription -errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a -defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer -codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. - -*1.F.2.* LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg(tm) trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg(tm) electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. -YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, -BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN -PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND -ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR -ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES -EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. - -*1.F.3.* LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with -your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with -the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a -refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity -providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to -receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy -is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further -opportunities to fix the problem. - -*1.F.4.* Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS,' WITH NO OTHER -WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO -WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -*1.F.5.* Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. -If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the -law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be -interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by -the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any -provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. - -*1.F.6.* INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works in accordance -with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, -promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic works, -harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, -that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do -or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg(tm) -work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any -Project Gutenberg(tm) work, and (c) any Defect you cause. - - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg(tm) - - -Project Gutenberg(tm) is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers -including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists -because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from -people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg(tm)'s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg(tm) collection will remain -freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and -permanent future for Project Gutenberg(tm) and future generations. To -learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and -how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the -Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org . - - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive -Foundation - - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state -of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue -Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification number is -64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at -http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf . Contributions to the -Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the -full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. -S. Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered -throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 -North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email -business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact -information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official page -at http://www.pglaf.org - -For additional contact information: - - Dr. Gregory B. Newby - Chief Executive and Director - gbnewby@pglaf.org - - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - - -Project Gutenberg(tm) depends upon and cannot survive without wide -spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where -we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any -statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside -the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways -including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, -please visit: http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate - - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg(tm) electronic -works. - - -Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg(tm) -concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared -with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project -Gutenberg(tm) eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg(tm) eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. unless -a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks -in compliance with any particular paper edition. - -Each eBook is in a subdirectory of the same number as the eBook's eBook -number, often in several formats including plain vanilla ASCII, -compressed (zipped), HTML and others. - -Corrected _editions_ of our eBooks replace the old file and take over -the old filename and etext number. The replaced older file is renamed. -_Versions_ based on separate sources are treated as new eBooks receiving -new filenames and etext numbers. - -Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: - - http://www.gutenberg.org - -This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg(tm), -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |